OS/2 Shareware BBS: 30 fixes_v/30-fixes_v.zip/fshelp.zip/filestar.hlp

OS/2 Help File | 1999-02-18 | 763KB | 9,179 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. About FileStar/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FileStar/2 is a simple, fast, intuitive and powerful OS/2 file management
utility that all levels of users will find beneficial on their Desktop.  It is
designed to ease the transition for DOS and Windows users migrating to the OS/2
environment, as well as for advanced OS/2 users who demand extended control
over their files.  It is not intended to be a replacement for the WPS Drives
object, but rather to provide users with enhanced file management functions
that users frequently use.

FileStar/2 provides a simple interface to your files, combining familiar file
manager concepts with the superior controls available in the OS/2 Presentation
Manager environment.  FileStar/2 uses a two-window approach to viewing
directory contents, with drag and drop capabilities for moving and copying
files between windows and other WPS objects, such as the shredder and printer
objects. Visual feedback on the progress of operations is provided.
Additionally, FileStar/2 employs a convenient point and click method for
specifying paths to perform all common file operations.

FileStar/2 is multithreaded and supports running different operations in its
two windows simultaneously.  For instance, you may copy selected files in one
directory to another directory in one file window while archiving all files in
a third directory in the other file window.  Other operations that do not
require a window, such as formatting a diskette, may be performed concurrently
with file operations.

FileStar/2 has excellent archived file support for InfoZip's ZIP.EXE and
UNZIP.EXE.  These programs support OS/2 Extended Attributes and are compatible
with Version 2 PKZIP compression software.  The InfoZip products are widely
available and are free.

FileStar/2 is a copyrighted product of SofTouch Systems, Inc, 1300 South
Meridian, Suite 600, Oklahoma City, OK. 73108, USA.  For sales and support,
phone [phone] or Fax [phone].

All Right Reserved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.1. About dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The About dialog is useful for viewing the version number of the product and
also the phone and fax numbers, and Internet address of SofTouch System, Inc.
for product support.

The dialog is opened by selecting the 'About...' item on the System and Action
Bar menus.  The 'About...' item is on both menus to accommodate those users
that prefer to remove the Action Bar menu.

To close the About dialog, push the 'STS'  pushbutton in the lower center of
the dialog with the LMB, the keyboard Spacebar or keyboard Enter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Installation and Updates ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section covers the following subjects;

     - Procedure for installation of this product.
     - How and when to apply Corrective Service updates.
     - Information about the FILESTAR.INI file.
     - Installing the Archive support files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. Installation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You must use the GTINST program for installation of FileStar/2. The
installation files are compressed and can only be decompressed by the GTINST
install program.

To install FileStar/2, switch to an OS/2 windowed or full screen session, place
the installation disk in your A: or B: drive, and type A:\GTINST or B:\GTINST
as appropriate at a command prompt. The installation is very simple and the
install program will easily guide you through the installation process.

The install may ask to alter your CONFIG.SYS file to add the path to the
FileStar/2 directory. You may opt to make this change to CONFIG.SYS manually.
You must reboot your system to activate any CONFIG.SYS changes.

The Required Files

The install program copies the required files, FILESTAR.EXE and BPMCC.DLL, to
the directory of choice. The FILESTAR.HLP file is also copied to the same
installation directory but is not required to run the program.

Alternate Installations

After the installation is complete, the BPMCC.DLL file may be manually put in a
directory listed in the config.sys LIBPATH statement (such as X:\OS2\DLL) and
the FILESTAR.HLP file in a directory likewise listed in the SET HELP statement
(such asX:\OS2\HELP). The directory in which the FILESTAR.INI file is created
and maintained may be designated by entering an environment variable in the
CONFIG.SYS file.

The environment variable must be entered as;

 SET FILESTAR=X:\PATH

where X:\PATH is the path to the chosen directory.  If a directory is specified
by the environment statement, the directory \WORKDIR is also created as a
subdirectory to the specified directory.  Lacking this information, the
FILESTAR.INI file will be located in the directory with FILESTAR.EXE. This
optional directory specification allows network workstation users to have
individual configuration files and working directories.

Register your copy

Complete and mail the registration card.  Maintenance releases may be sent to
registered customers from time to time without notice.  Only registered
customers will be notified of and eligible for upgrade opportunities. You
should complete and return the registration card even if you purchased the
software directly from SofTouch Systems, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. Corrective Service Updates ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Corrective service may be provided by STS  from time to time.  Corrective
service consists of code changes in response to problem reports.

The latest corrective service may be obtained at the SofTouch System's FTP site
(ftp.softouch.com) or CompuServe (GO SOFTOUCH, lib 12).  They may also
frequently be found on BBSs, such as the OS/2 Shareware BBS (703-385-4325).

How to Determine If You Need Corrective Service

You do not need to apply Corrective Service unless you are experiencing
problems.  The first step towards a potential resolution is ensuring that you
have the latest level of code.  To determine your code level, change to the
FileStar/2 directory and enter the command GTLEVEL at an OS/2 command prompt.
The output will be similar to the following:


      GtLevel Version 2.60
      Product Name:  FileStar/2
      Product Code:  8010
      Version:  2.00.0 CSD
      Level:  1996108

 If the last five digits of the CSD Level are less than the five digits in the
 name of the CSD file, you may apply Corrective Service to your installation.
 For example, if the CSD Level reported by GTLEVEL is 1996108 and the CSD file
 located on CompuServe is named FST96202.CSD, you may apply the CSD, since
 96108 is less than 96202.

 Installing Corrective Service

 You must use the GTINST installation program to install the corrective service
 updates.  Use the following procedure to install corrective service:

       * Shutdown all instances of FileStar/2.

       * Switch to a OS/2 window or full screen.

       * Start the install program from a command line:  GTINST
      d:\path\csdfile, specifying the full drive, path and file name of the
      corrective service file.

       * Review the readme file, which will be displayed for you, for any
      special instructions.

       * Click on Install. Follow any directions given by the installation
      program.

       * Once installation of the CSD has completed, you may restart
      FileStar/2.

 Note that the corrective service file name ends with ".CSD".  If you should
 rename the csd file, it must have an extension of ".CSD".

 Troubleshooting Corrective Service Installation

 The most common problem installing Corrective Service is not specifying the
 full path and filename, including extension, of the CSD file.  If you receive
 an error message indicating that the installation program could not find the
 input control file, reissue  the command specifying the full path and filename
 for the CSD.  If the path and file name were specified correctly, reinstall
 the base product and reattempt the procedure.  It is possible information
 needed to apply CSDs was not correctly written during the original
 installation or no longer exists because of a re-install of OS/2.
 Reinstalling the base product will resolve the problem in most instances.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3. The FILESTAR.INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FileStar/2 creates it's own initialization file, FILESTAR.INI, whenever it is
started without an existing file.  A new file will have default settings.  If
an existing file is found, the program uses it to restore previously used
settings and other parameters. All stored data are saved in this file and
nothing is written to the OS/2 initialization files.

On startup, the program searches the CONFIG.SYS file environment variables for
a SET FILESTAR=X:\PATH statement.  If one is found, that directory will be used
as the INI file directory.  If the environment directory doesn't exist, it will
be created.  If there is no environment directory specified, the directory of
the executable program file is used to hold the file.

You should make backup copies of the FILESTAR.INI file if you make extensive
customization changes.  If the file becomes corrupted, it will generally be
necessary to delete it and let the program generate a new default file or use a
backup copy.  To make a backup copy, simply copy the file to a floppy or
another drive for safekeeping.  To restore a backup copy, copy it to the
directory that contains the INI file and then close FileStar/2 without saving
its configuration using the 'Close w/o Save' option from the pulldown System
menu.  This is done to prevent the program from writing corrupted data to the
restored INI file.  Restart FileStar/2 and the restored INI data will be used
to initialize the program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4. Archiving Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The InfoZip files, ZIP.EXE and UNZIP.EXE, are normally installed as part of the
base program in the FileStar/2 directory.  If for some reason they are not
found in this directory, they may be found on, and extracted from, the
supplemental InfoZip disk and may be installed using the following procedure.

If the files are in the FileStar/2 directory and the program sends an error
message stating that these files cannot be found when executing a zip or unzip
function, either the CONFIG.SYS path statement must be updated to include the
directory in which they are located or you must configure the programs in the
Settings notebook as described in steps (7) and (9) below.

Installing Zip and Unzip Files

   1. Create a temporary directory using FileStar/2.

   2. Copy the two files from the InfoZIP diskette, UNZ512.EXE and ZIP201X2.ZIP
      (or the newer UNZ520.EXE and ZIP21x2.ZIP) into the temporary directory.

   3. The UNZ512.EXE (or UNZ520.EXE) file is a self-extracting file.  Execute
      the file by double clicking on the file name in the temporary directory.

   4. An OS/2 window will open and about 12 files will be extracted.  The one
      of interest is either unzip32.exe or unzip.exe, depending on the version.

   5. Rename the file unzip32.exe to UNZIP.EXE.

   6. Copy the UNZIP.EXE file into the directory you desire for your archive
      utilities.  Note that the program searches the PATH statement of your
      CONFIG.SYS file for the ZIP.EXE and UNZIP.EXE files and automatically
      handles the required configuration entries in the Settings notebook if
      the path is found in the search.  If the FileStar/2 directory is included
      in the PATH statement, it is a good choice for locating the archive
      utility files.

   7. Open the FileStar/2 Settings notebook and select the Paths page 3_1. Push
      the 'Unzip' button to check the Executable program entry field for a
      fully specified path to the file.  If the file is in a directory in the
      PATH statement, this field should be automatically filled.  If not,
      specify the complete path and filename to the executable file in the
      'Executable program' field, for example D:\FILESTAR\UNZIP.EXE. You may
      switch to the directory and LMB single click on the file name to fill the
      entry field with the required path/filename.

   8. Select the ZIP201X2.ZIP (or ZIP21x2.ZIP) file in the file window
      containing the temporary directory.  Select the 'Unzip' option from the
      Files menu and unzip the file to the temporary directory. Click in the
      temporary directory to set its path in the Unzip dialog. The file ZIP.EXE
      should be one of several extracted.

   9. Copy the ZIP.EXE file into the same directory as the UNZIP.EXE file.
      Check for the complete path and filename in the 'Zip' executable program
      entry field on the Paths page 3_1 of the FileStar/2 Settings notebook,
      for example C:\FILESTAR\UNZIP.EXE, in the same manner as used for the
      unzip file.  This completes the installation.

      Test the installation by double clicking on a zipped file with the LMB.
      A ZipView window should appear.  The window may be resized to your
      preference but the minimum size is probably adequate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Getting Started ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You should read the following sections before using the program;

      Starting FileStar/2
      FileStar/2 window
      Drives window
      Directories window
      Files windows
      Toolbar
      Data Panel
      Settings Notebook
      Point and Click Interface
      Drag and drop
      Key Assignments
      Selecting Files
      Starting Other Programs
      Functions
      Accessing WPS objects


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. Starting FileStar/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Starting with the Program Object

The install program will create a Desktop FileStar/2 program object.  To start
FileStar/2, double click on the program object.  The FileStar/2 initialization
screen will appear with a message indicating the directories being opened for
the file windows.  You may modify the Optional Parameters field of the Settings
notebook for the FileStar/2 program object to designate start up directories as
explained in Setting Start Parameters.  In normal use, the last used
directories are the startup directories.

Starting from a Command Prompt

To be able to start FileStar from a command line from any directory other than
the filestar directory, using simply the command "filestar", the filestar
directory must be in the CONFIG.SYS path statement. Otherwise, the command must
include a path component. Two startup path arguments may be added to the
command line as described in Startup Directories and by example, the command
'filestar C:\DOS D:\OS2 /min' would start FileStar/2 minimized with the startup
directories of C:\DOS and D:\OS2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.1. Setting Start Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When FileStar/2 is started for the first time after installation, the directory
in which FileStar/2 is installed will be initialized in both file windows.
Subsequent invocations of FileStar/2 will automatically open the directories
last used in the file windows. You may change this behaviour and specify the
directories to initialize with command line or Workplace Shell (WPS) Settings
notebook parameters. For example, entering the following command

     FILESTAR C:\OS2 D:\APPS

 from a command prompt or

     C:\OS2 D:\APPS

 in the Optional Parameters  field of the FileStar/2 WPS program object
 Settings notebook will start FileStar/2 with the C:\OS2 and D:\APPS
 directories initialized in the file windows.

 FileStar/2 may be started minimized, maximized or as a Swap window by setting
 options in the FileStar/2 Settings notebook  Controls, Page 2_3. These
 settings may be overridden from a command line or the program object by using
 one of the following parameters;


      Γûá  /swap  - Initialize as a Swap window.
      Γûá  /min  - Initialize program minimized.
      Γûá  /max  - Initialize program maximized.

 These parameters must immediately follow the program name and precede any path
 parameters, for example:

     FILESTAR /SWAP C:\OS2 D:\APPS

 The above command line, or the program object Settings notebook Parameters
 field modified as shown, would start FileStar/2 as a swap window with the
 directories initialized to C:\OS2 in file window one and D:\APPS in file
 window two.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. Point and Click Interface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Single Click Selects

A single click of the left mouse button (LMB) (or keyboard arrow scroll) always
selects a drive, directory or file as the object of a menu action.

Double Click Executes or Opens

A double click of the LMB (or keyboard Enter) always executes a drive change
(Drive Window), a directory change (Directory Window) or starts execution or
browsing of the selected file (File Window).

Changing Target Paths

Nearly all file and directory operations may be performed using dialogs and the
mouse without input from the keyboard.  Path information is passed to the
program through single clicking the left mouse button on directories in the
directory tree.  The program manages window focus and initially sets the path
of the opposite window as the path for most operations if the opposite window
is not in use with another operation. The user simply clicks on the directory
of choice in the directory tree to change the path.

If a different drive is needed, you may;

      Change drives in single tree mode if there is an operation dialog, such
      as Copy, present without affecting the selected files in the file window.

      Add a drive to the directory window using the Ctrl double click on a
      drive technique or by selecting the Multiples Trees option regardless of
      the presence of an operation dialog.

      Use the opposite window and change that window to the drive of choice and
      then select the directory.

 When any multiple file operation is initiated, the source file window is
 locked to prevent the user from accidentally destroying the selected file list
 or selecting other menu options. However, it is possible to freely switch
 windows to set window focus and swap directory trees. The source window
 remains locked until the user either cancels the operation or the operation is
 completed. The drive for the source window can be changed while the window is
 locked as noted above.

 NOTE:

 If the file window remains locked after an operation due to some abnormality,
 the lock may be removed by pushing the Size pushbutton in the Data Panel. This
 action will also reset the internal windows to their default size and
 position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. Drag and Drop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Drag and drop of files is supported between the file windows, from a file
window to it's associated directory tree(s) and to WPS objects that accept
files, such as the shredder, printer and certain program objects.  Unlike WPS
drag and drop, only selected files may be picked up in a drag operation and the
entire file window is an acceptable drop zone. In other words, FileStar does
not recognize files in a file window as an acceptable drop target. The
implementation enhances moving and copying files between the file windows and
the directory trees, albeit at the expense of WPS standardization.

To perform a drag and drop operation:

   1. Select the file(s).
   2. Pick up on one of the selected files using the right mouse button.
   3. Drag to other file window, a directory in the directory tree, a desktop
      object/folder or the desktop itself.
   4. Release right mouse button.

 The default action is move, unless the Default Drag is Move checkbox is
 deselected on the Options page of the Settings notebook, in which case the
 default action is copy.  Depressing the Ctrl key for a copy, or Shift for a
 move, overrides the default setting. If the default operation has been changed
 in the Settings Notebook to copy, holding down the Shift key will override it
 to a move operation.  Also, if the default has been set to copy, dragging
 outside of FileStar causes a reversion to the OS/2 default move operation.

  A second instance of FileStar may be started with drag and drop between any
 of the four different directory tree and file window possibilities.  To start
 a second instance, either create a second Desktop object and use it to start
 the second instance or modify the existing FileStar/2 Desktop object to create
 another FileStar/2 window when pushed.  The latter is accomplished by opening
 the Desktop object and selecting 'Create new window' in lieu of 'Display
 existing window' on the Window page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4. Key Assignments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See Keys help...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5. Selecting Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FileStar/2 provides two modes of multiple file selection, Extended selection
mode and Multiple selection mode.  Either mode allows selection of one or more
contiguous files, that is, successive files in the file window, with a single
swipe of the mouse.

Discontiguous selection of files is possible while in Extended selection mode
by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting discontiguous file(s).  If a file
is selected without holding down the Ctrl key, all other currently selected
files are deselected.

Multiple selection mode also allows selection of one or more files in any
discontiguous order.  It is not necessary to hold the Ctrl key down while doing
so. However, single clicking in the window will NOT deselect all files as in
the Extended select case and care must be exercised in those cases where the
action to follow is intended for only one file to ensure that there are no
other selected files (which may not be in the window field of view).

The default selection mode is Extended.  You may toggle between the two
selection modes by using the Selection type cascade menu from the Windows
Options menu.  The selected mode will remain in effect until the alternate mode
is selected by the user, including through shutdown and restart.  The Selection
type may be set differently in each file window.

While all file operations may be performed on a single file, operations on a
list of two or more files are limited to a subset of file operations. The menu
options grouped at the top of the files menu are applicable to multiple file
operation.

Selecting All Files

In either Extended or Multiple selection mode, all files may be selected or
deselected by invoking the Select all or Deselect all options from the Files
pull-down or pop-up menus, pushing the selected  pushbutton on the Data Panel,
or pressing the Ctrl+/ (select) and Ctrl+\  (deselect) key combinations.

The selected file allocated sizes are accumulated and totaled in the selected
window of the Data Panel.

There are three other quick select features in FileStar/2; one which selects
all files with the same extension from the displayed file list, another
restores a previously selected list and the third inverts an existing selected
list.

Selecting All Files with Same Extension

To select all files with the same file extension in a file window, single
select any file with that extension.  Then select the Select All *.ext menu
item from the window's popup or pulldown menu. Files with other extensions may
be added to the selected list by holding the Ctrl key down and adding that file
to the list.  Then again select Select All *.ext menu item.  From the keyboard,
you may add the files with a simple forward slash "/" in lieu of selecting the
menu item.

Restoring the Last Selected File List

To restore the last selected file list, use the keyboard command Alt + / or
select ReSelect from the pulldown or popup menu.  This option is only available
when all files have been deselected.

Inverting the Selected File List

To invert the selected file list, use the keyboard command Alt + / or select
Invert Selected from the pulldown or popup menu.  This option is only available
when there are files selected.

Modifying the Selected File List

Once a file operation is selected from a menu, such as copy or move, the file
window is disabled to user input, preventing any possibility of accidental
deselection of the selected file list. However, before the operation is
commenced, it is possible to modify the selected list by holding down the
modifier Ctrl key and selecting or deselecting the desired files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6. Starting Other Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double clicking on an Executable File

A double click of the left mouse button (or keyboard Enter) on an executable
file (file extensions of EXE, COM, BAT or CMD) will run the selected executable
file with the environment inherited from FileStar/2. This includes Windows
files.

Command Line Dialog

A Command Line dialog (which saves the last twenty commands) may also be
activated from the file window popup menu, toolbar or Alt+X key combination.
This dialog identifies the type of executable file, inserts the full path and
file name on the command line and provides options to run the program full
screen or windowed with the program auto-close set enabled or disabled.  The
dialog also has an option to auto-close the dialog on a Run command.

If the Command Line is activated with no executable file selected, the Execute
dialog presents a blank command line to the user. The user may select
executable files after popping up the dialog.

Toolbar Launch

The toolbar 'Launch' item may be set up to execute a program with or without
parameters.  The setup command line may include symbols to pass the highlighted
drive, directory or file as a parameter.

The 'Launch' item can contain multiple executable program items and when
clicked on, it drops down to show the items inserted and available for
execution.  Executable items may be dragged and dropped in any position in the
toolbar.  Hold down the ALT key while dragging to add the dropped item as a
dropdown item.

Toolbar bitmaps for Launch items must be loaded from a disk file.  Some
applications bitmaps are provided in the FileStar BMP subdirectory.

To create a toolbar Launch item, perform the following steps;

   1. LMB click on the Launch item (Space shuttle on pad).

   2. RMB click on last drop down item.  The default setup has one dummy item
      which may be deleted.

   3. From the Toolbar popup menu, select 'Create Item' to get the setup
      notebook.

   4. On Position page set style 'Regular item' and position 'End'.

   5. On the Action page,  select 'ExecuteProgram' in the Function list box.

   6. On the Action page, enter the command line in the Parameters field.  A
      command line to start the Web Explorer with 8 threads and in the quiet
      mode would be 'LINKUP.EXE EXPLORE.EXE -t 8 -q'.  Another example is
      'tedit.exe %F /a'.  Clicking the item would start the TEDIT text editor
      with the cursored file in its buffer and in an autoclose mode.  Press F1
      with the cursor in the Parameters field for possible command line
      parameters.

   7. On the General page,  either a title or bitmap is required.  You may use
      both.  The Create Bitmap panel describes the basics in creating a bitmap
      for use in the toolbar.

   8. Click on Ok to save it.

 Some programs may require you to add a CONFIG.SYS path since there is no way
 to designate a 'Working directory' but a leading '.;' in libpath and path is
 sufficient in most cases.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7. Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In most instances, there are a variety of methods for performing the same
function with FileStar/2.  For example, you can copy selected file(s) by either
pressing the copy button on the Toolbar, selecting the Copy option from the
Files pull down menu, pressing the right mouse button and selecting the Copy
option from the Files pop-up menu, pressing Alt+C (or c if Single Key Commands
is enabled), or dragging the file to the other file window or directory tree.
All accomplish the same goal, to copy selected files to a different directory.
You should choose the method which is most comfortable and convenient to your
style.

The following operations may be performed on drives:

      Γûá Format  (using PMFORMAT)
      Γûá Check Disk  (using PMCHKDSK)
      Γûá Query  (disk and media characteristics)
      Γûá Find  (all files matching mask)
      Γûá Seek  (using PMSEEK)
      Γûá Open WPS Drives

 The following functions are available for directory operations:

      Γûá Copy/Move  (across drive partitions)
      Γûá Create
      Γûá Delete  (deletes branch)
      Γûá Rename
      Γûá Archive
      Γûá Compare
      Γûá Change Attributes
      Γûá Open WPS Folders
      Γûá Query  (branch summary)
      Γûá Expand  (full branch expand)
      Γûá Collapse  (full branch collapse)
      Γûá Multiple directory views

 The following functions may be used on individual files or a selected list of
 files:

      Γûá Copy or Move (drag/drop or point/click dialogs)
      Γûá Delete  (drag/drop on shredder, delete with/without confirm dialog)
      Γûá Change attributes  (Read Only, Hidden, System, Archived)
      Γûá Change date and time  (last write)
      Γûá Archive and Extract  (point/click dialogs using InfoZip's ZIP.EXE and
      UNZIP.EXE only)
      Γûá Edit  (ASCII, ICO, BMP extensions using external editors)
      Γûá Browse  (ASCII, INF, ZIP and other file extensions using external
      browsers)
      Γûá Rename  (long file name entry field)
      Γûá Print  (ASCII only)
      Γûá Save file list  (saved to ASCII text file FILELIST.SAV)
      Γûá Print file list

 The following functions may be used only on individual files:

      Γûá Compare two files
      Γûá Execute  (double click EXE, COM, CMD, BAT extensions or use command
      line dialog)
      Γûá Default WPS Action.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8. Accessing WPS Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Work Place Shell objects may be easily accessed through FileStar/2. If you hold
down the ALT key and LMB double click (or keyboard Enter) on a drive letter or
directory, the default view of the Drives or Folder object is opened. In the
case of a file, the default WPS action is invoked. Other views, as well as the
object Settings notebook, may be opened through cascaded WPS menu options in
the Drives, Directories and Files menus.

A Desktop program object may be created for executable files. See Create
Program Object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. FileStar/2 Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 The FileStar Display

The FileStar/2 window is shown below.  For illustration purposes, the
horizontal size is less than normal.  This is primarily reflected in the
reduced width of the Name pushbutton/label/data field and the Message window in
the Data Panel.

The FileStar/2 display consists of four main windows--the Drive window,
Directory window, and two File Windows--encompassed above by the controls to
manipulate them, including the standard Presentation Manager Action Bar
pulldown menu and a Toolbar, and below by a Data Panel which displays
FileStar/2 messages, drive data and the cursored file information such as file
size, last write date and time and attributes.  The current date and time are
also shown in separate windows in the format specified by the country code
page.

See the following related subjects:

      Getting Started
      Windows
      Functions
      Menus
      Messages
      Drive Operations
      Directory Operations
      File Operations
      Settings Notebook


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. Using Online Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is generally available for each specific menu item and window or dialog.
Use the Tab or arrow keys to highlight the item or control of interest and then
push the help function key (F1).

Press F1 for general help with the internal window that has the input focus.
Use the function keys to activate the desired internal window from the
keyboard. See Keys Help.

Press F4, then F1 for general help with the main FileStar/2 frame window.

Most dialog windows have a Help pushbutton that is general help for that
dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. Primary Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FileStar/2 uses windows to display files in two selected directories,
directories on multiple drives, and available drives on a system.  These
windows are located adjacent to each other in the center of the FileStar/2
window.  A Toolbar window is normally located just above these windows (it may
be hidden if desired) and is used to initiate various operations and commands.
A Data Panel window is located at the bottom of the display and provides
various data windows and a message window.  These windows are contained within
the FileStar/2 frame window, and hence are referred to as internal windows.

These internal windows are the main focus of the FileStar/2 display. However,
FileStar/2 uses many other dialog windows (generally referred to herein as
simply a "dialog") to present information and obtain input.

See the following related subjects:

      The Active Window
      Internal Window Sizing
      Expanding and Restoring Windows
      Resetting Internal Windows
      Swap window
      Message window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. The Active Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Drive and Directory windows, at the left of the FileStar/2 display,
indicate the drive and volume directory tree for the directory displayed in the
active file window and are background color matched to enhance association. The
Drive and Directory windows may also be selected as the active window, allowing
for drive or directory operations. To activate a particular window, click
anywhere on the window with the left mouse button.

The two File windows allow you to view the contents of two separate directories
simultaneously and copy or move files between them.

One of the internal windows will normally be the active window with user inputs
enabled. When a dialog window is used it will normally become the active
window. However, most dialog windows also allow the user to refocus on one of
the internal windows while remaining in the foreground.

Only one window is active at a time.  The active window generally depends on
whether drive, directory or file operations are being performed.  The active
window is indicated by the color of the title bar (and border if customized by
the Scheme Palette, which is highly recommended).  By default, in OS/2 Warp,
recessive windows will appear gray with dark gray title text while the active
window will appear dark blue/purple with white title text. It is important to
always keep in mind which window is active since some operations on files and
directories are invoked by common commands that are window specific.

The active window title bar color may be changed for the FileStar/2 window
without affecting other Desktop windows.  When the main window title bar color
is changed, the internal windows inherit those colors.

To change the color of the FileStar/2 title bar, activate a Color Palette.
Then activate FileStar/2.  Drag a color to the FileStar/2 title bar and drop
it.  Make sure that the drag from the palette did not activate the Palette and
deactivate FileStar/2.  Some desktop enhancers will not allow this.  Deactivate
the offending program if that is the case.  You should be able to drag a color
from the inactive palette without taking focus from the FileStar/2 window.

FileStar/2 has two internal windows, the Toolbar and Data Panel windows, that
use a raised border to indicate an active status.  When inactive, these windows
have a depressed border.

To activate a particular window, single click with the left mouse button
anywhere within the border of the desired window. When using the keyboard, hold
down the Alt key and use the arrow keys to scroll through the available
windows.  A third option is to select the window desired using the Function
Keys.  See Keys Help for additional keyboard information.

In some instances, it is necessary to take the user input focus from all
internal windows and make the FileStar Window itself the active window (one
instance is when accessing General Help with the F1 function key). This cannot
be accomplished with the keyboard arrow keys or the mouse.  The FileStar
primary window is selected with the F4 function key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4. Keyboard Window Navigation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following keys may be used to enhance keyboard window navigation;

      F2      - Select Toolbar window.
      F4      - Select FileStar/2 window or topmost dialog window.
      F5      - Select Drive window.
      F6      - Select Directory window.
      F7      - Select File Window One.
      F8      - Select File Window Two.
      F9      - Select Data Panel window.

 Alt + Arrow Key Combinations (selection is rotary)

      ALT + Up key   - Switches to next window up.
      ALT + Down key  - Switches to next window down.
      ALT + Left key  - Switches to next window left.
      ALT + Right key - Switches to next window right.

 If a dialog window is present, it is included in the rotary vertical ring.

 Tab Key (selection is rotary)

      TAB        - Switches to next window right.
      Shift + TAB    - Switches to next window left.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5. Window Sizing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The FileStar/2 frame window and four of its internal windows may be resized by
the user.  See Frame and Internal Window Sizing for the limitations on window
sizing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5.1. Frame Window Sizing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The FileStar/2 display may be resized like any OS/2 application, by dragging
its borders; the internal windows are adjusted automatically when you resize
FileStar/2.  If you prefer a full screen display, double click the left mouse
button on the title bar or the maximize button.

After installation, the FileStar/2 frame window will be sized to 86% of the
horizontal and 67% of the vertical resolution of the display, except for VGA.
In VGA mode (640x480), the default size of the display is 632x420.  The window
may be resized to the user's preference.  The  FileStar/2 window may not be
resized smaller than 592x368 at VGA resolutions 640x480 and 800x600 or smaller
than 768x422 for 1024x768 resolution.

Pushing the Size button in the data panel while depressing the Ctrl and Shift
keys (or Ctrl Shift W) will resize the window to optimum size for the current
resolution.  Only the Name field and Message window in the Data Panel are
resized when sizing the main frame window; all others are fixed in width.  At
592 pixels, the Name field is minimum size and essentially not useable; further
reduction would result in overlaying pushbuttons and windows in the Data Panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5.2. Internal window Sizing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The size of the internal windows is determined by the size of the FileStar/2
frame window. Resizing the FileStar/2 frame window will proportionally resize
the drive, directory and file windows. All windows that have sizeable borders,
including some dialog windows, may be resized in the same manner as any window
in OS/2:  by moving the pointer over the border of the window, holding down
either mouse button, dragging the border to the desired size and releasing the
mouse button. These changes are retained from session to session of FileStar/2
in the FILESTAR.INI file.

The resizing of the internal windows is limited as follows:

      Γûá The Drive Window is fixed in width but may be resized vertically.
      Γûá The Directory Window may be resized vertically and horizontally to the
      right only.
      Γûá The File Windows may be both vertically and horizontally resized.

 The size and position of the FileStar/2 window and all internal windows are
 always saved on shutdown and used to to restore the display on the next start
 up.

 All dialog windows that are sizeable (some only may be resized in one
 dimension) also have their size and screen position saved, when the dialog is
 closed, for next time use.

 Moving the Internal Windows

 The FileStar/2 internal windows are not moveable.  The fixed positioning aids
 in maintaining window arrangement within the FileStar/2 window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5.3. Expanding and Restoring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File windows may be "maximized" horizontally to the full width of the
FileStar/2 window, and the Directory window may be "maximized" horizontally to
the full width of the FileStar/2 window less the width of the Drives window, by
mouse clicking on the window maximize control or double clicking in the
titlebar. Another mouse click on the same control or double click in the title
bar restores normal window size.  These controls provide versatile window
sizing options, including four levels of zoom; normal, FileStar window
horizontal size, full screen normal and full screen horizontal size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5.4. Resetting Internal Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To reset all internal windows to their default size and and position, push the
button (window label for the cursored file size) on the Data Panel or use Ctrl
W. This action only resets the current window style; it does NOT reset the size
and position of the alternative window styles.

To reset all window styles simultaneously, push the Size button while holding
down the Shift key or use Shift W.

Pushing the Size button also resets the window lock that is placed on the
active file window during copy, move, delete, zip and other operations.  It is
recommended that you avoid performing this action if an operation is in
progress.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6. File Window Styles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are five programmed window arrangements for the two File windows.  These
are referred to as 'styles'.  Tiled windows may be either vertically or
horizontally tiled.  Tiled Vertical is the initalization default; thereafter,
the mode in use at shutdown is restored upon the next invocation of FileStar/2.
The user may resize and rearrange any or all of the five styles.  The size and
position will be retained or proportionally resized during frame window size
changes.  The windows may be reset to default size and position using the Size
pushbutton on the Data Panel or Ctrl W.

File window styles may be toggled in a rotary fashion by pushing the window
Ring  pushbutton in the lower left corner of either file window.  The window
ring may be toggled forward or backward using the LMB/RMB or F11/F12.

For further description of these file styles, see;

      Tiled
      Cascaded
      Custom
      Twin
      Resetting Internal Windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6.1. Tiled ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Tiled file windows are adjacently positioned, with both windows fully visible.
The windows may be positioned vertically or horizontally, as illustrated:

Example of Vertically Tiled File Windows

Example of Horizontally Tiled File Windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6.2. Cascaded ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In cascaded file window mode, the active window partially obscures the
recessive window as shown.  Activating the recessive file window brings it to
the foreground.

Example of Cascaded File Windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6.3. Custom ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The custom file windows arrangement is similar to cascaded, with the active
window partially obscuring the recessive window. However, in custom mode the
size and position of the active and inactive windows is constant, regardless of
which file window is active.  When the recessive file window is activated, it
is automatically resized to the active size and placed in the foreground, while
the previously active window is automatically resized to the recessive size and
placed in the background.

Example of Custom File Windows

Note that the 'O:\a test dir' directory is active and the 'J:\GRAPHICS\v202'
directory is inactive.  When the inactive window, 'J:\GRAPHICS\v202', is
selected, the directories will be reversed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6.4. Twin ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Twin window style has two twin side by side windows enlarged to occupy the
entire center window area.

Example of Twin File Windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7. The Swap Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FileStar/2 allows you to easily resize the display to a Swap window for quick,
convenient monitoring of memory resources. The default position of the Swap
window is the lower left corner of the Desktop.  However, it saves its position
and may be paced anywhere on the Desktop. The Swap window is sized such that
only the swap window information is viewable.  It may be resized in length but
not height.

The swap window alternately displays the size of the swap file, the amount of
free space on the disk that is available for swap file growth, the amount of
virtual memory available and a special WorkFree memory parameter.
Additionally, it will monitor the amount of available memory, providing a
message and audible warning when the amount falls below a preset level.  The
settings for the display switching interval and available memory warning level
are on the Controls Setup page of the Settings notebook.

The WorkFree parameter is a calculated summation of the free ram and free swap
file space.  The latter is the amount of allocated swap file space not
currently in use.  These numbers are not guaranteed to be accurate.  However,
the display does serve its intended purpose.  The number shows the proximity to
swap file growth.  The swap file will typically increase anytime this number
decreases to between 1 and 2 Mb.

There are two ways to switch the FileStar/2 window to the Swap window; double
click in the left end of the Message window of the Data Panel at the bottom of
the display or use the Swap control  on the frame window title bar.  To restore
the display, double click again in the message window of the swap window or use
the Swap control.  Use of the Swap control is recommended.

You may maximize or minimize the FileStar/2 window from the Swap window in the
same manner as if it were restored.

FileStar is essentially not using any CPU time in this mode but is occupying
all of its normal memory resources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7.1. Swap Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 'Swap' control  is located on the main frame window title bar to the left
of the frame window 'Minimize' control. When pushed with the LMB, it resizes
the FileStar/2 window to a small Swap window.

The control button changes shape depending on it's current state.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.8. Message Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Message window, at the bottom left of the Data Panel, displays a bar
reporting the progress and the results of most file operations as well as
information, warning and error messages for FileStar/2 operations.

During periods of inactivity, the message Window alternately displays the
amount of free space remaining on disk, the size of the swap file, the amount
of memory available to the system and 'WorkFree' memory which is the
approximate sum of free RAM and free allocated swap space.

Since the Message Window appears in the FileStar/2 Swap window, you can use
FileStar/2 to monitor your system memory usage. OS/2 uses disk space to create
virtual RAM, swapping pages of memory in and out or RAM memory to disk storage.
This is the purpose of the OS/2 swap file.  Thus the amount of available memory
on a system equals roughly the amount of RAM plus the amount of free space
remaining on the volume which contains the SWAPPER.DAT file. The volume used is
specified in the SWAPPATH statement of the CONFIG.SYS file. Swapping, however,
is inherently slower than accessing RAM memory. By keeping FileStar/2 visible
as a Swap window on your Desktop and monitoring the effect of applications on
the swap file and available memory, you can determine and avoid combinations of
applications that stress your system.

If there is no operation in progress, you may click with the LMB in the right
half of the window to recall and alternate the display between the last message
and the swap data. Clicking on the swap data text will advance the display to
the next parameter. The four parameters will automatically cycle in the Message
window, displayed for the time specified by the Swap Display Update Frequency
control on the second page of the Controls Setup tab of the Settings notebook
(by default, 20 seconds).

Messages are stored by FileStar/2 (limited to the last ten of each type) and
may be reviewed in the Message History dialog, which may be invoked by
selecting the Message History option from the Windows menu or by clicking with
the right mouse button in the Message window.

Activating the Swap Window

You may use the Swap control in the upper right corner of the frame window or
double clicking with the LMB button on the swap data display in the Message
window to reduce the main window to the Swap window.  Either method may also be
used to restore a normal display.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.8.1. Message History Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Session messages are saved and may be viewed at any time by selecting the
Message History option from the Windows popup (right mouse click anywhere in
the Data Panel except the message window) or pulldown menu, or by clicking with
the right mouse button in the Message window.

Three levels of messages may be displayed:

     Information messages  (silent)
     Warning messages    (produces a warning tone)
     Error messages     (produces a error tone)

 The level of messages displayed is specified by selecting the corresponding
 check box on the dialog. The last ten messages of each type are saved by
 FileStar/2.  To review the messages, select the message type.

 The Message History dialog also displays the time since boot and the peak swap
 file size during the current FileStar/2 session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are two forms of menus in FileStar/2:  pull-down menus and  pop-up menus.
Once accessed, selecting options on a menu is identical in both forms.  Click
the left mouse button with the pointer on the desired menu item, or press the
underlined menu control character to select an option to invoke an action.
Clicking with the left mouse button anywhere outside of the menu or pressing
the Esc key will exit the menu without selecting an action.

Key assignments are listed beside the menu options and are useful to quickly
learn hot key shortcuts to performing actions in FileStar/2.

Menu Help

Item specific help is generally available for menu items.  Cursor to the item
of interest or press and hold the LMB on the item and press F1.  Some menus
have a Help item at the bottom which, when accessed, has hypertext links to all
menu items on that menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. Menu Customization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Foreground and background colors, as well as the menu font, of the Action Bar
menu may be set by the user; for more information, see the section entitled
Customizing FileStar/2.

The Action Bar may be removed from the display by deselecting the Standard Menu
option in the FileStar/2 Settings notebook. This is a viable option since all
menu items are accessible from pop up menus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2. Action Bar Primary Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A standard Presentation Manager Action Bar, located immediately below the
FileStar/2 window title bar, provides access to pull-down menus.  A pull-down
menu will appear whenever the menu caption on the Action Bar is selected by
clicking either mouse button on the label or by pressing the underlined menu
control character (not all options have such characters). You may move from one
primary menu option to another by pressing the left and right arrow cursor
keys.  Options on a pull down menu may be accessed by using the up and down
cursor keys.  For example, to access the Drives pull down menu, click on the
Drives caption, or press D.

Keystrokes to activate the menu from the keyboard are limited to Alt, Alt + D
and Alt + S to permit the use of "Alt plus" keystokes as hot keys for most of
the functions found on the menus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1. Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Drives menu item is used to activate the pulldown menu for the Drives
window.

Accelerator Key - Alt D


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.1. Read All Dirs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This item is an option toggle and is checked ON when selected.

Default is OFF.

Selects partial or complete drive reads for directories.  If deselected, only
the first two levels of directories are read plus whatever is required to
display the current or passed parameter directory.  This results in presenting
a useable directory tree much quicker.  If the user needs deeper level
directories, they are read as required as the user expands a directory.

When ON, the first two levels of directories are read normally.  Then a
background thread is started to finish reading all directories on the drive.
The design of the drive and directory reads is such that this is not normally
required or desirable. Consequently, it is recommended that this option only be
used on smaller drives or when the entire directory tree needs to be read into
the Directory Tree window.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.2. Scan Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting this item will initiate a read of the highlighted drive. It has the
same effect as a LMB double click on a drive, which is the recommended method
to initiate a drive read.

 Occasionally the drive information may not be current, due, for example, to an
outside operation adding a directory to the current drive.  Rescanning the
drive refreshes the directory tree display to include such changes.

If both file windows are logged to the same drive and either window is busy
with an operation, rescanning the drive is not permitted and the menu option is
disabled.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Shift R


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.3. Remap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option refreshes the list of available drives when desired.

In normal operation, all accessible drives are queried whenever a different
file window is activated or a drive is rescanned.  Therefore, this function is
seldom required.  Use it only in a network environment and then only when there
is an indication that the drive list has changed.

There is a notebook settings option that will accomplish a drive remap
automatically once each Swap window data cycle period.

Accelerator Keys - None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.4. Filter... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu option activates the Directory Filter dialog, which is used to set
filtering and other directory search parameters for the next drive read.

The directory filtering is drive specific.  The Directory Filter dialog for the
highlighted drive is activated.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl L


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.5. Query... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu option will activate a windowed display of the file system and media
characteristics for the selected drive.

You may add or edit the drive Volume Label from the display.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Shift Q


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.6. Available... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option activates a dialog which shows all available drives and drive type
and allows drives to be selected or deselected for display.

This option is not drive specific and selecting it with any drive selected
results in the same display.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.7. Multiple Trees ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu item toggles the Multiple Trees option, which enables the addition of
trees to the Directory window without the need of holding down the CTRL key.

Default is OFF which results in a single directory tree.

When checked ON, the Directory window is not cleared before reading a different
drive, thereby adding a directory tree for each drive read.

The advantage is that you may rapidly switch between any drives that have been
read with a single click on the drive letter.  The only refresh that is
required is to reread the current directory for the selected drive. Implemented
in this fashion, only those drives used are ever read, and those only once.

Another advantage is that directory and file operations across drives is much
easier with the Point and Click interface.  You may also drag and drop from a
file window to any directory of any drive in the window.

The disadvantage is that you can end up with a lot of directories in the
multiple trees and more scrolling is generally required. However, the current
directory is automatically selected when a drive switch is made. Another
disadvantage is that more memory is required.  Because of the latter, if you
have several drives you should consider how many are in memory and remove those
that are no longer needed. The number of trees is not important; what consumes
memory is the number of directories in those trees.

Cascaded menu options allow you to to restore the last multiple drive setup in
a session or to restore the last multiple drive setup upon startup.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl T


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.8. Add a drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option is enabled whenever Multiple Trees is enabled and the selected
drive has not been added to the Directory window.

If enabled, selecting this option will add the indicated drive to those already
in the Directory window. It is primarily helpful to keyboard users since a LMB
double click will accomplish the same.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Enter


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.9. Remove a drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option is enabled whenever Multiple Trees is selected and there is more
than one drive in the Directory window. It will indicate removal of the current
drive. Selecting it will remove the current drive from the Directory window.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Shift Enter


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.10. Check... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu option executes the OS/2 utility program PMCHKDSK.EXE on the selected
drive. This program checks the selected drive for errors.

This option will be grayed out (not available) if the selected drive is in use
in either of the two file window.

The PMCHKDSK.EXE program file must be located in a directory included in the
PATH statement of the CONFIG.SYS file. This is normally the case.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.11. Format... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu option executes the OS/2 utility program PMFORMAT.EXE on the selected
drive. This program formats the selected drive.

This option will be grayed out (not available) if the selected drive is in use
in either of the two file window.

The PMFORMAT.EXE program file must be located in a directory included in the
PATH statement of the CONFIG.SYS file. This is normally the case.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.12. Find File... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option activates a File Find dialog that may be used to search one to all
drives for files matching a wildcard name pattern. At the end of the search,
the user may quickly change to the directory containing the found file(s) with
a LMB double click.

Accelerator Keys - Alt F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.13. Find Text... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu option executes the OS/2 utility program PMSEEK.EXE. This program can
do file and text searches on all drives.

The PMSEEK.EXE program file must be located in a directory included in the PATH
statement of the CONFIG.SYS file. This is normally the case.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.14. WPS Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu option opens the default WPS view for the selected drive. The
cascaded menu options will open the WPS Settings notebook or tree, details, or
icon views of the drive object.

The default WPS view may also be obtained by pressing the ALT key while double
clicking with the LMB on the drive.

Accelerator Keys - Alt Enter


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.14.1. Default ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default menu item.  Opens the default WPS Drives view for the selected
drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.14.2. Tree ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Tree menu item.  Opens the WPS Drives tree view for the selected drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.14.3. Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Details menu item.  Opens the WPS Drives details view for the selected
drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.14.4. Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Icon menu item.  Opens the WPS Drives icon view for the selected drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1.14.5. Open Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Open Settings menu item.  Opens the WPS Drives settings notebook for the
selected drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2. Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Directories submenu, and the identical context (popup) menu, contains menu
items specific to manipulation of directories and subdirectories.

Accelerator Keys - Alt I


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.1. Copy... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Copy... menu item activates the Copy Directory dialog from which you may
copy the selected directory (the source directory) to any drive on the system
that is write enabled.

The Copy Directory dialog uses the point and click interface, with the user
clicking on a directory object to automatically enter the full target path to
the new parent directory, or the user may manually enter the full target path
for the copy operation. If the user enters a directory name that does not
exist, it will be created.

The Copy operation copies the directory in the Copy field to the target path
directory in the to field. Global file-name characters are not allowed in
target names.

If an I/O error occurs, the target subdirectory is deleted from the target
path.

Read-only files in the target path will be overwritten.

Directory attributes, such as date of creation, and time of creation, are
copied from the source to the target.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl C


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.2. Move... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Move... menu item activates the Move Directory dialog from which you may
move the selected directory to any drive on the system.  The Move Directory
dialog uses the point and click interface, with the user clicking on the parent
directory object to automatically enter the full path, or the user may manually
enter the full path for the copy operation.

Global file name characters are not allowed in the target name.

A move directory operation on the same drive is very fast and involves only
changing its subdirectory location. The file system does not support moving a
directory to a different drive. Therefore, a move to a different drive results
in a directory copy and delete operation and is much slower.

Any attempt to move a parent subdirectory to one of its descendant
subdirectories will be rejected, because a subdirectory cannot be both an
ancestor and a descendant of the the same subdirectory.

Any attempt to move the current subdirectory or any of its ancestors for the
current process, or any other process, will also be rejected.

Attributes of the directory are moved to the target.  If read-only files exist
in the target path, they are not replaced.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl M


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.3. Rename... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Rename... directory menu item activates the Rename Directory dialog. From
this dialog you may rename the directory to any name acceptable to the file
system.  The Rename entry field is validated as the user enters the new name.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl N


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.4. Create... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Create... directory menu item activates the Create Directory dialog.  From
this dialog a directory may be created as a subdirectory to the current
selected directory.  The current selected directory may be changed after
invoking the dialog by simply clicking on another directory.

The Create directory entry field is validated as the user enters the new
directory name.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Ins


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.5. Delete... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Delete directory menu item will initiate a directory delete operation.
There is always user confirmation before a directory is deleted.

The first level of confirmation is optional and activates a Delete Directory
dialog to ask for confirmation.  This dialog may be bypassed by unchecking
Confirm directory delete on the Options page of the Settings notebook. If the
confirmation is turned off, the menu item is over and underlined; if it is on,
the menu item will indicate that it is a dialog item (...).

The second level of confirmation is always invoked if the directory is not
empty.  An Interactive Message window will appear showing the full path of the
directory to be deleted and warn that it contains files or subdirectories.  The
user may elect to continue or or abort.

If confirmation is turned off and the directory is empty of files or other
subdirectories, it is deleted without any further intervention when this item
is selected.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Del


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.6. Zip... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Zip... menu item will activate a Zip Directory dialog with the current
selected directory as the source directory.  This dialog enables the user to
click in the full target path and edit the target zip file name, or the user
may manually enter the full target path and file name for the target zip file.
Zip option switches may also be set from the dialog which allow for zipping
only the selected directory or the selected directory branch.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Z


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.7. Compare... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Compare... menu item activates a Compare Directories dialog that can
compare the current files in the two file windows. Comparisons may be based on
either a match in the file name, size and/or date/time or a difference in file
names.

File name comparison on FAT drives is based on the longname EA if one exists,
making comparisons between FAT and HPFS file system directories possible.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl =


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.8. Query... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Query... menu item initiates a query of the selected directory.  The query
results are shown in a Directory Query dialog.

The Directory Query dialog show the number of files and subdirectories in the
selected directory and the total actual and allocated sizes of the these files
and subdirectories.

The allocated size is the actual disk space occupied by these files and
subdirectories.  The difference between actual and allocated size is the
overhead disk space used in storing these files.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Q


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.9. Attributes... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Attributes... menu item activates a Directory Attributes dialog that shows
the current R (read only), S (system), H (hidden) and A (archived) attributes
and permits the user to change these attributes.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl A


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.10. Expand Branch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Expand Branch menu item expands all levels of the selected directory.  This
is different than clicking on an expand + which only expands one level.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl +

Note

The Ctrl + accelerator keys require using the shift key as well if using the
shifted + key.  Use the keypad Gray + key to avoid having to use the shift key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.11. Collapse Branch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Collapse Branch menu item collapses all levels of the selected directory.
This is different than clicking on a
collapse - which only collapses the current directory.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl - (minus or gray minus keys)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.12. Collapse All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Collapse All menu item collapses all directory trees in Multiple Trees
moding. The trees may be individually re-expanded in Multiple Trees by a LMB
single click on the desired drive letter.

This option will also collapse a single directory tree from any subdirectory.
The Collapse Branch option requires the selected directory to be the root
directory to achieve the same result.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Shift - (minus or gray minus keys)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.13. WPS Folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The WPS Folder menu item opens the default view of the selected directory. This
is the default action if the cascaded submenu for this option is not selected.

Accelerator Keys - Alt Enter

Note:

Holding down the Alt key while double clicking the LMB on a directory in the
tree also results in opening the WPS folder and is the recommended way for
performing this action.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.13.1. Default ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The WPS Folder Default menu item opens the default view of the selected
directory.

Accelerator Keys - Alt Enter

Note:

Holding down the Alt key while double clicking the LMB on a directory in the
tree also results in opening the WPS folder and is the recommended way for
performing this action.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.13.2. Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The WPS Folder->Text cascaded menu item opens the WPS folder Text view of the
selected directory.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.13.3. Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The WPS Folder->Details cascaded menu item opens the WPS folder Details view of
the selected directory.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.13.4. Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The WPS Folder->Icon cascaded menu item opens the WPS folder Icon view of the
selected directory.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.13.5. Open Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The WPS Folder->Open Settings cascaded menu item opens the WPS Settings
notebook for the selected directory.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.14. Scan Dir ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Scan Dir menu item initiates a rescan of the current directory.

This item has a cascaded submenu for the Subject and Longname EA loading
options.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl R or Grey *


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.14.1. Load Subjects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Directories menu item Scan Dirs->Load Subjects toggles the option to load
the file Subject Extended Attributes.

Loading the file subject EAs slows disk reads. This may be negligible on high
performance machines to objectionable on low end machines or on some networks.
It is therefore optional as to whether the subject EA is scanned when reading
drives.

The subject EA may be viewed for individual files with the Files
Browse->Subject menu item (Shift B Toggle).  This provides a way to view a
files' subject without using this loading option.

Accelerator Keys - Alt Shift *


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.14.2. Load Longnames ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Directories menu item Scan Dirs->Load Longnames toggles the option to load
the file Longname Extended Attributes.

Loading the file longname EAs slows disk reads. This may be negligible on high
performance machines to objectionable on low end machines or on some networks.
It is therefore optional as to whether the longname EA is scanned when reading
drives.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Shift *


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.15. Add Dir ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selection of the Add Dir menu item results in adding the files of the selected
directory to those already in the active file window.  This is referred to as
Multiple Directory Views. It is similar to the Read Branch option but does not
clear all files from the file window before reading the directory.

The Add Dir option may be used after a Read Branch to add individual
directories to those read with the Read Branch option but not vice versa.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Enter


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.16. Read Branch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selection of the Read Branch menu item results in reading the files of the
entire selected directory branch (the selected directory and all of its
subdirectories) into the active file window.  This is referred to as Multiple
Directory Views. It is similar to the Add Dir option but clears all files from
the file window before reading the branch.

The Add Dir option may be used after a Read Branch to add individual
directories but you cannot add a branch to existing files in the file window.
However, you may add different drives to the window by selecting the Read
Branch item with the drive root directory selected. You must be in Multiple
Trees moding to do this.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Shift Enter


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.17. Change Dir... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Change Dir... menu item activates the Change Directory dialog. This dialog
has an entry field for the user to enter a directory name.  The first directory
match in the directory tree is highlighted as the user types in the desired
name. When the desired directory is matched, a keyboard Enter changes to that
directory. The correct directory is often found with as few as 2 or 3
characters.

A drive (e.g. D:) or a full path may also be entered to switch to directories
not in the current directory tree(s).

Accelerator Keys - '\' or F3


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.18. Last Dirs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Last Dirs menu item pops up the Last Used Directories menu.  This menu is
maintained by the program and consists of the last 10 directories used.
Directories are not duplicated if already in the list.  Selecting a directory
from the menu results in a change to that directory.

The directories in the Last Dirs menu may be from any drive available to the
system, including removable media disks. If the directory is not found (it may
have been deleted or is not on the current disk in a removable media drive),
the appropriate error message is generated.

Alternatively, the toolbar Last Dirs item or a RMB click on either of the
Window Switch pushbuttons at the bottom of the Directory window may be used to
activate this menu.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl D


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.19. Freq Dirs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Freq Dirs menu item pops up the Frequently Used Directories menu.  This
menu consists of 10 directories and is built by the user using the Set Freq
Dirs option at the bottom of the menu.  Selecting a directory from the menu
results in a change to that directory.

The directories in the Freq Dirs menu may be from any drive available to the
system, including removable media disks. If the directory is not found (it may
have been deleted or is not on the current disk in a removable media drive),
the appropriate error message is generated.

Alternatively, the toolbar Freq Dirs item or a RMB click on the Last Dir
pushbutton at the bottom of the Directory window may be used to activate this
menu.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.20. Parent Dir ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selection of the Parent Dir menu item results in a directory change to the
parent of the current directory.

The mouse alternative is to push the Parent Directory pushbutton in the lower
right corner of each file window.

Accelerator Keys - Alt . (period)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2.21. Last Dir ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selection of the Last Dir menu item will result in a directory change to the
last directory used in the current active file window.

The mouse alternative is to push the Last Directory pushbutton located at the
bottom of the Directory window.  This pushbutton is labeled with the number of
current directories in the tree for the selected drive.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl . (period)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3. Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Files submenu...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.1. Copy... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Copy... menu item activates the Copy Files dialog from which you may copy
the selected files from the source directory to any other directory on the
system that is write enabled. You cannot copy files to a CDROM drive since the
media is read only.

The Copy Files dialog uses the point and click interface, with the user
clicking on a directory object to automatically enter the full path of the
target directory, or the user may manually enter the full target path for the
copy operation.

If you are copying more than a single file, you may add a directory name that
doesn't exist to the path and the directory will be created. Global file-name
characters are not allowed in target directory and file names.

If you are copying a single file and change the filename, that file is cloned
to the new name.  You may clone a file to the same directory as the source.

If an I/O error occurs, the Copy Error dialog will appear. This dialog will
indicate the cause of the error as well as provide the options to overwrite
existing target files of the same name, rename files that have the same name as
existing target files, remove any file attributes that may be the cause of the
error or skip the file with the error.

The Copy dialog has a check box which may be used to toggle the Verify Write
option for the current operation.  It may be set to default to either state in
the Settings notebook Options.

File attributes, such as date and and time of creation and extended attributes
are copied from the source to the target.

Accelerator Keys - Alt C


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.2. Move... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Move... menu item activates the Move Files dialog from which you may move
the selected files to any drive on the system with the exception of drives that
are read only, such as CDROM drives.  The Move Files dialog uses the point and
click interface, with the user clicking on the directory object to
automatically enter the full target path, or the user may manually enter the
full target path for the copy operation.

A file move operation on the same drive is very fast and involves only changing
its subdirectory location. The file system does not support moving files to a
different drive. Therefore, a move to a different drive results in a file copy
and delete operation and is much slower.

If you are moving more than a single file, you may add a directory name that
doesn't exist to the path and the directory will be created. Global file-name
characters are not allowed in target directory and file names.

If you are moving a single file and change the filename, that file is cloned to
the new name.  You may clone a file to the same directory as the source.

If an I/O error occurs, the Move Error dialog will appear. This dialog will
indicate the cause of the error as well as provide the options to overwrite
existing target files of the same name, rename files that have the same name as
existing target files, remove any file attributes that may be the cause of the
error or skip the file with the error.

The Move dialog has a check box which may be used to toggle the Verify Write
option for the current operation.  It may be set to default to either state in
the Settings notebook Options.

File attributes, such as date and and time of creation and extended attributes
are moved from the source to the target.

Accelerator Keys - Alt M


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.3. Delete... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Delete menu item will initiate a file delete operation. There is a file
delete dialog that appears for user confirmation before selected files are
deleted if the option Confirm file delete is checked ON on the Options of the
Settings notebook.  Otherwise, all selected files are deleted without any
confirmation.

If the file delete confirmation is turned OFF, the menu item is over and
underlined; if it is ON, the menu item will indicate that it is a dialog item
(...).

There are two methods of deleting files; delete and forced delete. There is a
check box on the File Delete dialog that may be used to toggle this option for
the current operation.  If the file is force deleted, it is permanently deleted
and not recoverable via the DELETE directory. There is an option on the Options
of the settings notebook, Default is forced file delete, that sets the default
state of file delete.

Warning:  You must enable the DELETE directory in the configuration file
(config.sys) for each drive that you want to be able to recover files after a
non-forced delete. This is highly recommended, especially if you delete files
without confirmation.

On the file delete dialog, the file delete method may be toggled to the desired
state for that operation only. It is set to the default condition when the
dialog is activated.

If files are deleted with no confirmation dialog, the default setting in the
notebook is used for determination of whether or not to force file delete.

Accelerator Keys - Alt Del


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.4. Zip... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Zip... menu item will activate a Zip Files dialog from which you may zip
the selected files to an archive file. The default target directory may be set
in the Settings notebook (See Zip Options). The Zip Files dialog enables the
user to easily modify the target directory for the zip file by clicking in the
full target path. To zip the file into the directory of either file window,
simply click anywhere in the window to set that windows path into the target
field. The user also may manually enter the full target path for the file.

A default target file name of 'noname00' is provided but you should edit the
target zip file name. A '.zip' extension is not required in the target
filename.

Zip option switches may also be set from the dialog by pushing the Options
pushbutton in the lower left corner of the dialog.  The options entry field may
also be manually edited without using the Options pushbutton if you know the
options desired.

Accelerator Keys - Alt Z


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.5. Unzip... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Unzip... menu item will activate an Unzip Files dialog from which you may
unzip the selected files to a selected directory. The default target directory
may be set in the Settings notebook (See Unzip Options). The Unzip Files dialog
enables the user to easily modify the target directory by clicking in the full
target path. To unzip the files into the directory of either file window,
simply click anywhere in the window to set that windows path into the target
field. The user also may manually enter the full target path for the directory.

Unzip option switches may also be set from the dialog by pushing the Options
pushbutton in the lower left corner of the dialog.  The options entry field may
also be manually edited without using the Options pushbutton if you know the
options desired.

Accelerator Keys - Alt U


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.6. Attributes... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Attributes... menu item activates a Change File Attributes dialog.  Using
this dialog, you may change the read only (R), hidden (H), system (S) and
archived (A) file attributes for the selected file(s).

Accelerator Keys - Alt A


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.7. Date/Time... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Date/Time... menu item activates a Change File Date/Time dialog.  Using
this dialog, you may change the last write date and or time for the selected
file(s).

Accelerator Keys - Alt D


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.8. Undelete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Undelete menu item switches the directory of the active file window to the
DELETE directory for the selected drive if one exists.  Once the DELETE
directory is read into the file window, deleted files may be browsed with a LMB
double click or selected and, through a popup menu, may then be undeleted,
permanently deleted or browsed.

Accelerator Keys - Alt Ctrl U


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.9. Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An editing operation must be initiated from one of the menus, the Toolbar or
Alt+E combination keys. An ASCII text file will be edited using the editor
entered as the external program editor (defaults to EPM.EXE). If a file with an
extension of BMP, PTR or ICO is selected, the OS/2 utility ICONEDIT.EXE is
started to edit or view the file. These files (EPM.EXE and ICONEDIT.EXE) must
be located in the environment path.

If multiple files are selected and the external editor is set to accept
multiple files (see Configure External Programs), all files will be read into
one instance of the editor.  If the editor is not set to accept multiple files,
separate instances of the editor are started for the first 10 selected files.
In other words, you get 10 windows of the editor, one for each file.

Accelerator Keys - Alt E


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.9.1. Subject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit->Subject menu item opens a file subject entry field in the Data Panel
similar to a file Rename operation.  You may then enter a short description of
the cursored file using up to 40 characters. The file Name pushbutton changes
to 'Subject'.  Push this button to save the subject.  Use 'ESC' to abort the
operation.

Accelerator Keys - Shift E


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.10. Browse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Fixed File Associations

Double clicking with the LMB (or keyboard Enter) on a .ZIP file causes the
contents of the archived file to be listed in a ZipView Window. Support is
limited to those files that are compatible with InfoZip's UNZIP.EXE and ZIP.EXE
which must be available to FileStar/2 with the path to those files set in the
External Programs page of the Settings notebook.  FileStar/2 will find these
files and enter them as appropriate in the External Programs page if they are
in a path found in the SET PATH environment variable in the CONFIG.SYS file.

A LMB double click (or keyboard Enter) on a file with an extension of .INF
results in launching the OS/2 VIEW.EXE utility to view the selected file.

A LMB double click (or keyboard Enter) on a file with an extension of .MET
results in launching the OS/2 PICVIEW.EXE utility to view the selected file.

The VIEW.EXE and PICVIEW.EXE files must be in a directory included in the
environment path (they typically are).

User Defined File Associations

User defined file associations may be set in the Settings notebook, Paths pages
3_2 and 3_3.  When a file is double clicked on with the LMB (or keyboard Enter)
and it does not have an extension that matches one of the fixed file
associations noted above and is not an executable file, the user defined
associations are checked for a match.  If a match is found, that user defined
program is run with the clicked on file as the command line argument.

Undefined File Associations

A double click of the LMB (or keyboard Enter) on a non-executable file with an
extension not defined under the fixed or user defined associations will launch
the browse program entered on the External Programs page (Path tab) in the
Settings Notebook (defaulted to E.EXE editor) with the selected file as the
program argument. The program may be set to test for an ASCII file by checking
the Enable ASCII Filter in the Configure External Program dialog for the browse
function.  If this option is set, the browse program will only load pure ASCII
files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.10.1. Subject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Subject menu item toggles the option to display the subject  of the
cursored file in the Message window.

Accelerator Keys - Shift B


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.11. Select All *.ext ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selects all files with the the extension of the cursored file. The selected
list may be expanded to include other extensions by using the Ctrl key (if
Extended Selection is being used) to select another file with the desired
extension.  Then select this option again to add those files with extensions
matching the last selected file.

Accelerator Keys - '/'


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.12. Select/deselect All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu option either selects all files or, if more than one file is
selected, deselects all files.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl '/' (Select) or Ctrl '\' (Deselect)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.13. Reselect/Invert ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If there are no files selected, this option will reselect the last selected
list of files.  If there are files selected, it will invert the selected file
list.  It is a toggle switch and will reverse the state of the selected files.

Accelerator Keys - Alt '/'


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.14. ZipView... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu option activates the ZipView Window. If activated with a cursored
file that does not have a .ZIP file extension, the ZipView Window is
initialized in a create mode. If the cursored file has a .ZIP extension, the
contents of the zip file are listed in the ZipView Window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.14.1. Unzip to Work Dir ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Unzip to Work Dir (Alt W) menu item.  Dumps the contents of the zip file
into the FileStar/2 work directory (WORKDIR).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.14.2. ZipView Add... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Add... (Alt A) menu item.  Initiates the dialog process to add file(s) to
the zip file in the ZipView window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.14.3. Zip Extract... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Extract... (Alt X) menu item.  Initiates the dialog process to extract the
selected files from the zip file in the ZipView window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.14.4. Zip Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit (Alt E) menu item.  Opens the selected file in the ZipView window
using the default editor.  The file is extracted to the WORKDIR directory for
editing and then rezipped.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.14.5. Zip Browse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Zip Browse (Alt B) menu item.  Opens the selected file in the ZipView
window using the appropriate associated program or default browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.15. Execute... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Executable File dialog is activated with the cursored file set in the
command line if it is an executable file. The file type is identified and shown
in the dialog title bar.

The command line may be concatenated with a drive, directory or file(s) by
holding down the CTRL key and making a selection.  The selection must be
compatible with the executable program or command. E.g., typing 'DIR' and then
adding D: with a Ctrl click on the 'D' drive letter will do a directory listing
on D: drive but adding a file name will not.  See the Executable File dialog
for further help with command line options.

Depending on the type of executable file identified, options to run the file in
a window or full screen and with or without auto-close at the completion of the
program may be enabled.

If the cursored file is not executable, the dialog is still activated but the
command line is filled with the first command in the previously saved command
list.

Accelerator Keys - Alt X


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.16. Rename... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A long file name entry field is presented in the Data Panel with the cursored
file name ready for editing. If changes are made in the file name, the Name
pushbutton label changes to Rename which is then pushed to rename the file. If
no changes are made to the filename, pushing the Name pushbutton or Esc cancels
the operation.

If Rename is selected with multiple files selected, the Name pushbutton will be
titled Rename Files versus Rename for a single file.  Wildcards may then be
used to rename all selected files using the pattern entered.  If a rename
conflict exists, the function will error out without renaming any files beyond
that point.

Accelerator Keys - Alt N


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.17. Print... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Default Printing

When an external print program is defined and configured on the External
Programs page of the Setup notebook, the default action when selecting Print,
on either the pulldown or popup Files menu, is to print the selected file
through that program.  You may configure 'PRINT.COM' as the external print
program to cause it to bypass the internal print function and print directly to
the configured printer port.  If the 'Print' External Program entry is left
blank, the internal print dialog interface is used.

Hot keys and menu options, Print - No Options (Ctrl P), have been assigned to
allow printing directly to the spooler through the OS/2 file 'PRINT. COM' or to
use the internal print option dialogs, Print - Options (Ctrl Alt P), regardless
of the presence of a user defined print program.

Using Print Options

When Print - Options is selected, a Print Options dialog window is opened that
permits you to select which installed printer to use as well as the printer
font for those printers that are capable.

Additional setup options allow selection of margins, inclusion of headers and
footers including use of the file name as a header and the date/time stamp in
the footer.  Acceptable printer forms should be detected and selectable and
well as adding line numbers to the output. The Job Properties dialog may also
be accessed from this dialog before commencing a file print.

Multiple files may be selected for printing. The limit is 50 files.  All
selected files are spooled in one print job.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.18. File List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is a cascaded menu option and is defaulted to save a list of the selected
files to an ASCII text file named FILELIST.SAV in the current directory.

Accelerator Keys - Alt Y


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.18.1. Save File List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu option saves a list of the selected files to an ASCII text file named
FILELIST.SAV in the current directory.

Accelerator Keys - Alt Y


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.18.2. Print File List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Print File List menu item will send a list of selected files of the
selected files to the printer.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.19. Compare ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option initiates a file comparison of two files. The default installation
uses the OS/2 file COMP.COM to make the comparison. However, this option is
really intended to be used with one of the widely available PM file compare
programs under the file selection control of FileStar/2.  An external program
link may be set in the Paths->External Programs page of the setup notebook to
the file compare program of your choice.

If there are identically named files in the two file windows and they are
selected, the file compare program will start with a comparison of these two
selected files.

If there are two selected files in the active window and none of the same name
in the inactive window, the two files selected in the active window are
compared.

If there is no selected file in the inactive window and only one selected in
the active window, a search is made of the inactive window for a file of the
same name as the cursored file in the active window. If one is found, the
comparison is performed on these two files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.20. WPS Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is a cascaded menu item.  The default action is set to the WPS Object menu
item which initiates the associated WPS action for the file.

Accelerator Keys - Alt Enter

Note:

Holding down the Alt key while double clicking the LMB on a file has the same
effect as selecting this menu option and is the recommended way for performing
this action.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.20.1. Default WPS Action ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is a cascaded menu item.  The default action is set to the WPS Object menu
item which initiates the associated WPS action for the selected file(s).

The cascaded menu also allows you to create a WPS program object if the
selected file is an executeable program or open the Settings notebook of the
selected file.

Accelerator Keys - Alt Enter

Note:

Holding down the Alt key while double clicking the LMB on a file has the same
effect as selecting this menu option and is the recommended way for performing
this action.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.20.2. Create Program Object... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Create Program Object dialog is initialized with the selected executeable
file name in the Object Title entry field, the current path in the Work
Directory field, the type of program detected and a default setting of Minimize
to Hide.  You may modify any of these as desired.

The Open Mode setting is non-functional and this version only supports
placement of the object on the Desktop.

Press Create when the parameters and entry fields are correct. An "Object
successfully created" message will appear above the Parameters entry field
briefly and then the dialog will auto-close.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Alt C


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3.20.3. Open Settings Notebook\tCtrl Alt O ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Open Settings Notebook menu item opens the WPS Settings notebook for the
selected file.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Alt O


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4. Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are four window styles available in FileStar/2:  tiled, cascaded, custom
and twin. Additionally, tiled windows may be either vertically or horizontally
tiled, producing a total of five possible file window arrangements.

Tiled Vertical is the initalization default; thereafter, the mode in use at
shutdown is restored upon the next invocation of FileStar/2.

File windows may be resized and the size and position will be retained. Using
the SIZE button will reset the displayed style to the default settings for the
mode.

File window styles may be toggled in a rotary fashion by pushing the Window
Toggle pushbutton in the lower left corner of either file window, or by
pressing F11/F12 to rotate forward or backward through the window ring. Pushing
the Window Toggle pushbutton with the LMB toggles the window ring forward;
pushing it with the RMB toggles it backwards.

A 'Last' window style pushbutton may also be configured in the toolbar.

Accelerator Keys - Alt W


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.1. Tile Vertical ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Tile Vertical menu item restores the vertical tiled window style.  Any user
rearrangement or size changes are retained.

The default arrangement of vertically tiled file windows are two adjacent,
equally sized windows with both fully visible. To reset the windows to default
size and position, push the Size pushbutton in the Data Panel.

This arrangement is good for all window views except Details view, which
normally needs a wider window.

Accelerator Keys - Alt 1


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.2. Tile Horizontal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Tile Horizontal menu item restores the horizontal tiled window style.  Any
user rearrangement or size changes are retained.

The default arrangement of horizontally tiled file windows are two equally
sized windows positioned one over the other with both fully visible. To reset
the windows to default size and position, push the Size pushbutton in the Data
Panel.

This arrangement is good for all window views but the number of files in the
instantenous Details field of view is less than that of the other styles.

Accelerator Keys - Alt 2

Example of Horizontally Tiled File Windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.3. Cascade ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Cascade menu item restores the cascaded file window style. Any user
rearrangement or size changes are retained.

The default cascaded window arrangement is one where the active window
partially obscures the recessive window as shown.  Activating the recessive
file window brings it to the foreground. To reset the windows to default size
and position, push the Size pushbutton in the Data Panel.

This arrangement is good for all window views.

Accelerator Keys - Alt 3

Example of Cascaded File Windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.4. Custom ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Custom menu item restores the custom file window style. Any user
rearrangement or size changes are retained.

The default custom window arrangement is one where the active window partially
obscures the recessive window as shown.  Activating the recessive file window
brings it to the foreground. However, the size and position of the active and
inactive windows is constant, regardless of which file window is active.  When
the recessive file window is activated, it is automatically resized to the
active size and placed in the foreground, while the previously active window is
automatically resized to the recessive size and placed in the background.

To reset the windows to default size and position, push the Size pushbutton in
the Data Panel.

This arrangement is good for all window views.

Accelerator Keys - Alt 4

Example of Custom File Windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.5. Twin ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Twin menu item restores the twin file window style. Any user rearrangement
or size changes are retained.

The default twin window arrangement is two equally sized windows, similar to
vertically tiled windows, that occupy all the center window area of the main
FileStar/2 window.  This style is excellent for viewing files in the Details
view.  However, the windows obscure the Drive and Directory windows.  To
restore the Drive and Directory windows on top, push F5 or F6 respectively.
Then click in the current file window to again put it on top when finished with
the Drive or Directory windows.

This window style is automatically set when comparing directories using the
Compare dialog.

You must select another window style to exit the twin window style except when
using the Compare dialog.  Use the window style 'Ring' pushbutton in the lower
left corner of each File window to toggle the window style to next/last style
or use the Alt 1 through 4 keys to select the desired style.  A 'Last' window
style pushbutton may also be configured in the toolbar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.6. Toggle Ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Toggle Ring menu item toggles the ring of window styles in a forward
direction.  The order of the ring is;

   1. Tiled Vertical
   2. Tiled Horizontal
   3. Cascaded
   4. Custom
   5. Twin

 Accelerator Keys -

 F11 - forward toggle

 F12 - backward toggle


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.7. Reset Current ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Reset Current menu item resets the current window style to default size and
position.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl W

Mouse user tip:

You may use the LMB and push the Data Panel Size pushbutton to achieve the same
result as the keyboard 'W' in all window sizing commands. For example, holding
down the Ctrl key and pushing Size will invoke the same command as a keyboard
Ctrl W.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.8. Reset Ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Reset Ring menu item resets the all window styles to default size and
position.

Accelerator Keys - Alt Shift W

Mouse user tip:

You may use the LMB and push the Data Panel Size pushbutton to achieve the same
result as the keyboard 'W' in all window sizing commands. For example, holding
down the Alt+Shift key and pushing Size will invoke the same command as a
keyboard Alt Shift W.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.9. Reset Frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Reset Frame menu item resets the FileStar/2 window to the 'optimum' size
and position for the screen size.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Shift W

Mouse user tip:

You may use the LMB and push the Data Panel Size pushbutton to achieve the same
result as the keyboard 'W' in all window sizing commands. For example, holding
down the Ctrl Shift keys and pushing Size will invoke the same command as a
keyboard Ctrl Shift W.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.10. Reset All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Reset All menu item resets the FileStar/2 window to the 'optimum' size and
position for the screen size and resets all internal windows to their default
size and position.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Alt W

Mouse user tip:

You may use the LMB and push the Data Panel Size pushbutton to achieve the same
result as the keyboard 'W' in all window sizing commands. For example, holding
down the Ctrl Alt keys and pushing Size will invoke the same command as a
keyboard Ctrl Alt W.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.11. Hide/Restore Toolbar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Hide/Restore toolbar menu item toggles the display status of the Toolbar
window.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Shift F2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.12. Hide/Restore Menu Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Hide/Restore menu item toggles the display status of the Action Bar menu.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Shift F3


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.13. Select ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Select cascaded submenu provides menu items to select various windows for
activation with input focus.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.13.1. Toolbar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Toolbar menu item activates and sets input focus to the Toolbar window.

Accelerator Keys - F2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.13.2. Dialog/FileStar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Dialog/FileStar menu item activates and sets input focus to the to the
topmost dialog window if one is present.  Otherwise, the FileStar/2 window
receives the focus.

Accelerator Keys - F4


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.13.3. Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Drives menu item activates and sets input focus to the Drives window.

Accelerator Keys - F5


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.13.4. Directories\tF6 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Directories menu item activates and sets input focus to the Directory tree
window.

Accelerator Keys - F6


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.13.5. Files 'A' ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Files A menu item activates and sets input focus to the File window A.

Accelerator Keys - F7


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.13.6. Files 'B' ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Files B menu item activates and sets input focus to the File window B.

Accelerator Keys - F8


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.13.7. Data Panel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Data Panel menu item activates and sets input focus to the Data Panel.

Accelerator Keys - F9


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.13.8. Message... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Message... menu item activates and sets input focus to the Message History
dialog.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Alt M


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.13.9. Swap\tCtrl F9 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Swap menu item activates and sets input focus to the Swap window.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl F9


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.14. OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 menu item opens an OS/2 window with the path of the active file
window.  The OS/2 windows opened with FileStar/2 are titled with a numeric
reference so that they may be identified in the Window Task List.

Accelerator Keys - Alt O


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4.15. DOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The DOS menu item opens an DOS window with the path of the active file window.
The DOS windows opened with FileStar/2 are titled with a numeric reference so
that they may be identified in the Window Task List.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl O


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5. Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Setup submenu... contains items used to customize the configuration.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.1. Settings... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Settings... menu item opens the FileStar/2 Notebook for Users Settings and
Information. This notebook is used to set the majority of users preferences.

Accelerator Keys - Alt S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.2. Palettes... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Palettes... cascaded submenu contains menu items to open the Color and Font
palettes. The user may use these palettes to set the individualized colors and
fonts for most of the controls and windows in the main FileStar/2 display
window.

Notes:

Colors and fonts dropped on dialog windows are not saved.

You must use the File Windows Color dialog in the Settings notebook, Page 5_1,
to set the colors of the Drive, Directory and File windows.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.2.1. Solid Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Solid Color menu item opens the Solid Color Palette. These colors are the
basic 16 VGA colors.  Because of a Warp bug, these colors are reset to the
basic colors on each use.  Therefore, if the user edits any of these colors,
those editing changes are lost when the Palette window is closed.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.2.2. Mixed Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Mixed Color menu item opens the Mixed Color Palette. These colors are the
256 VGA colors. Because of a Warp bug, the colors are not in their usual order
when this palette is called up from FileStar/2.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.2.3. Font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Font menu item opens the WPS Font Palette. The user may change the font of
most windows and controls in the main FileStar/2 display.  The Setting
notebook, Page 4_1, has a Font dialog which is recommended for setting the font
of the windows in lieu of using the Font Palette.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.3. Save Config ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Save Config menu item is used to force an immediate save for all
configuration parameters.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl S


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.4. Filter... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Filter menu item activates the File Filter dialog. This dialog is used to
input a combination of filename masks and file attributes to filter files that
are read into either the active File window or both File Windows.
Additionally, a sort option may be applied to one or both file windows.

Accelerator Keys - Alt L


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.5. Last Filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Last Filter menu item toggles the file filter for the active window between
the last used and current filter.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Alt L


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.6. Select View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Select View is a cascaded menu item that selects between Text, Details,
Name, and Icon views of the active File window.  Each has cascaded menus items
to select normal or mini-icon for display.

See Click and View for a single click way to set the windows views.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.6.1. Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Text menu item sets the active File window to the Text view.

Accelerator Keys - Alt T


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.6.2. Detail ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Detail menu item sets the active File window to the Details view.

Accelerator Keys - Alt T


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.6.3. Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Name menu item sets the active File window to the Name Flowed view. It has
a cascaded menu item that selects the display of normal or mini-icons.

Accelerator Keys - Alt I


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.6.4. Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Icon menu item sets the active File window to the Icon view. It has a
cascaded menu item that selects the display of normal or mini-icons.

Accelerator Keys - Alt I


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.7. Selection Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Selection Type menu item has cascaded menu options to set the type of file
selection used in the File windows. See Selecting Files for further help with
these options.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.7.1. Extended ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Extended menu item sets the type of file selection in the active File
window to Extended Selection.  See Selecting Files for further help with this
option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.7.2. Multiple ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Multiple menu item sets the type of file selection in the active File
window to Multiple Selection.  See Selecting Files for further help with this
option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.8. Sort by ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Sort by menu item is a cascaded menu with options to sort the active File
window.  See Click and Sort for a single click way to sort the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.8.1. Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Name menu sorts the current file list by name.

Accelerator Keys -

     Ctrl Shift N - Sort by name
     Ctrl Shift > - Ascending sort
     Ctrl Shift < - Descending sort


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.8.2. Ext ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ext menu sorts the current file list by filename extension.

Accelerator Keys -

     Ctrl Shift E - Sort by filename extension
     Ctrl Shift > - Ascending sort
     Ctrl Shift < - Descending sort


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.8.3. Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Size menu sorts the current file list by file size.

Accelerator Keys -

     Ctrl Shift S - Sort by size
     Ctrl Shift > - Ascending sort
     Ctrl Shift < - Descending sort


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.8.4. Date ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Date menu sorts the current file list by date.

Accelerator Keys -

     Ctrl Shift D - Sort by date
     Ctrl Shift > - Ascending sort
     Ctrl Shift < - Descending sort


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.8.5. None ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The None menu item will display the file list unsorted.

Accelerator Keys - None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.9. Show Longnames ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Show Longnames menu item will toggle the Details view display of the
Longname column.  This menu item will be grayed out if file longnames are not
loaded.  See Load Longnames.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Gray *


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.10. Show Subjects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Show Subjects menu item will toggle the Details view display of the
Subjects column.  This menu item will be grayed out if file subjects are not
loaded.  See Load Subjects.

Accelerator Keys - Alt Gray *


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5.11. Show EA Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Show EA Size menu item will toggle the Details view display of the EAS
column (Size of extended attributes).

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Alt Gray *


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.6. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help submenu...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.6.1. Help index... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use the Help index to display an alphabetic list of references to the help
topics in the active program.

 Note:   To see all text of the index entries, maximize the Index window.

You can select an index entry to display the help topic that is related to that
index entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.6.2. General help... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 The FileStar Display

The FileStar/2 window is shown below.  For illustration purposes, the
horizontal size is less than normal.  This is primarily reflected in the
reduced width of the Name pushbutton/label/data field and the Message window in
the Data Panel.

The FileStar/2 display consists of four main windows--the Drive window,
Directory window, and two File Windows--encompassed above by the controls to
manipulate them, including the standard Presentation Manager Action Bar
pulldown menu and a Button Bar, and below by a Data Panel which displays
FileStar/2 messages, drive data and the cursored file information such as file
size, last write date and time and attributes.  The current date and time are
also shown in separate windows in the format specified by the country code
page.

See the following related subjects:

      Windows
      Functions
      Menus
      Messages
      Drive Operations
      Directory Operations
      File Operations
      Settings Notebook


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.6.3. Contents... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Contents to display the table of contents for the active program.  The
table of contents contains the titles of all help topics.

You can select one or more of the topics, one at a time, to view them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.6.4. Using help... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Extensive online help is instantly available by selecting the Help option from
the Action Bar Help pull down menu or pressing the Help button on the Button
Bar. The latter method replaces the Button Bar with the Button Help Bar, which
contains buttons for the various help options available.

Help is available for all windows and dialogs within FileStar/2:

      Γûá Press F4, then F1 for help with the FileStar/2 frame window.
      Γûá Press F1 for help with the internal active window.
      Γûá Press F1 for help with any dialog that has the user input focus.
      Γûá For help using the Settings Notebook, press F1 with the Cover page
      selected.
      Γûá Press F1 for help with any selected page of the Settings Notebook.
      Γûá Most dialogs also have a Help pushbutton which will activate the help
      for that dialog.

 Every help window has a menu bar that contains Services, Options, Help
 choices. Use the Options menu choices to:

      Γûá Display the table of contents (the titles of all help topics).
      Γûá Manage the table of contents (if there is more than one level of help
      topics).
      Γûá Display a list of the help topics you have viewed.
      Γûá Display a list of subdirectories that contain help topics in which you
      can search for a word or phrase.
      Γûá Display the last help topic you viewed.

 The help window contains a Services menu bar choice.  Use the Services menu
 choices to:

      Γûá Look for help information by searching for words or phrases.
      Γûá Print help information.
      Γûá Copy help information.
      Γûá Open a new help window in which you can display another help topic.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.6.5. Keys help... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Function Keys and Function Key Combinations

      F1      - Help for active window.
      F2      - Select Toolbar window.
      F3      - Change Directory.
      F4      - Select FileStar/2 window or topmost dialog window.
      F5      - Select Drive window.
      F6      - Select Directory window.
      F7      - Select File Window One.
      F8      - Select File Window Two.
      F9      - Select Data Panel window.
      F10     - Activate main menu.
      F11/F12   - Toggle window ring forward/backward.
      ALT + F4   - Close FileStar/2.
      ALT + F7   - Move FileStar/2 window.
      ALT + F8   - Size FileStar/2 window.
      ALT + F10  - Maximize active window if expandable.
      Alt + Spc  - Select System Menu.
      Ctrl + F9   - Toggle Swap window
      SHIFT+F10  - Window popup menu.

 Alt + Arrow Key Combinations (selection is rotary)

      ALT + Up key   - Switches to next window up.
      ALT + Down key  - Switches to next window down.
      ALT + Left key  - Switches to next window left.
      ALT + Right key - Switches to next window right.

 Tab Key (selection is rotary)

      TAB        - Switches to next window right.
      Shift + TAB    - Switches to next window left.

 Single Key Commands

      +    - Expands directory branch.
      -    - Collapses directory branch.
      /    - Selects all files with same extension.
      \    - Pops up the Change Directory dialog.
      Del   - Deletes files/directories if Single Key Delete enabled.
      Ins   - Create file or directory.
      Gray * - Refreshes the active file window.

 If Single Key Commands is enabled, all asterisked combinations below will
 function without the use of the Alt or Ctrl key combination.  The file window
 single key commands correspond with the Alt combinations.  The directory
 window single key commands correspond with the Ctrl combinations.  The input
 focus must be in the appropriate window, i.e.  "a" or "A", with focus in a
 file window, opens the dialog to change file attributes but the same keys with
 focus in a directory window opens the dialog to change directory attributes.

 Shift + Key Combinations

      Shift + ?    - Window Options menu
      Shift + *    - Toggle Load Subject EAs
      Shift + |    - Seek file mode
      Shift + B    - Display Subject EA
      Shift + E    - Edit Subject EA
      Shift + W    - Reset all internal windows in ring

 Alt + Key Combinations

      Alt + .     - Go To parent directory
      Alt + =     - Compare files
      Alt + /     - Reselect/Invert selected files
      Alt + Gray *   - Toggle Show Subject EAs
      Alt + 1     - Tiled Vertical window style
      Alt + 2     - Tiled Horizontal window style
      Alt + 3     - Cascaded window style
      Alt + 4     - Custom window style
      Alt + 5     - Twin window style
      Alt + A (*)   - Change file attributes
      Alt + B (*)   - Browse selected file(s)
      Alt + C (*)   - Copy selected file(s)
      Alt + D (*)   - File Date/Time dialog
      Alt + E (*)   - Edit selected file(s)
      Alt + F (*)   - Find File dialog
      Alt + H (*)   - Activate Help Toolbar or pulldown menu
      Alt + I     - Toggle Icon view
      Alt + L (*)   - File Filter dialog
      Alt + M (*)   - Move selected file(s)
      Alt + N (*)   - Rename selected file(s)
      Alt + O (*)   - Activate an OS/2 window
      Alt + P (*)   - Print selected file(s)
      Alt + S (*)   - FileStar/2 Settings notebook
      Alt + T (*)   - Toggle Text view
      Alt + U (*)   - Unzip selected file(s)
      Alt + V (*)   - View selected zip file(s) contents
      Alt + X (*)   - Execute dialog
      Alt + Y     - Save list of selected files to disk
      Alt + Z (*)   - Zip selected file(s)

 Ctrl + Key Combinations

      Ctrl + +     - Expand all levels
      Ctrl + -     - Collapse all levels
      Ctrl + =     - Compare Directories dialog
      Ctrl + .     - Previous directory
      Ctrl + /     - Selects all files in active window
      Ctrl + \     - Deselects all files in active window
      Ctrl + Gray *  - Toggle Show Longname EAs
      Ctrl + A (*)   - Directory Attributes dialog
      CTRL + C (*)   - Copy selected directory
      Ctrl + D (*)   - Last Directories popup menu
      Ctrl + F (*)   - Frequent Directories popup menu
      Ctrl + L (*)   - Directory Filter dialog
      Ctrl + M (*)   - Move selected directory
      Ctrl + N (*)   - Rename selected directory
      Ctrl + O     - Activate a DOS window
      Ctrl + P     - Print with PRINT.COM
      Ctrl + Q (*)   - Sum directory branch
      Ctrl + R     - Rescan directory
      Ctrl + S     - Save FileStar/2 configuration
      Ctrl + T     - Toggle multiple trees
      Ctrl + U     - Update the Frequent Directories List
      Ctrl + W     - Resets current windows
      Ctrl + Z (*)   - Zip selected directory

 Multiple Key Combinations

      Ctrl+Alt + =   - Compare directories, external program
      Ctrl+Alt + *   - Toggle Show EA Size
      Ctrl+Alt + C   - Create Desktop object
      Ctrl+Alt + L   - Reapply last file filter
      Ctrl+Alt + M   - Redisplay last informational message
      Ctrl+Alt + O   - Invoke object settings notebook
      Ctrl+Alt + P   - Print with internal dialogs
      Ctrl+Alt + U   - Go to DELETE directory
      Ctrl+Alt + W   - Resize all internal windows to default
      Ctrl+Shift + F2 - Toggle show/hide Toolbar
      Ctrl+Shift + F3 - Toggle show/hide Action Bar Menu
      Ctrl+Shift + ?  - Display Window Options Menu
      Ctrl+Shift + *  - Toggle Load Longname EA
      Ctrl+Shift + -  - Collapse all trees
      Ctrl+Shift + I  - Toggle mini icons
      Ctrl+Shift + Q  - Query drive
      Ctrl+Shift + R  - Rescan drive
      Ctrl+Shift + T  - Restore multiple trees
      Ctrl+Shift + W  - Resize frame window to default

 File Window Sort

      Ctrl+Shift + N  - Sort by file name
      Ctrl+Shift + E  - Sort by file name extension
      Ctrl+Shift + S  - Sort by file size
      Ctrl+Shift + D  - Sort by file date/time
      Ctrl+Shift + >  - Sort ascending
      Ctrl+Shift + <  - Sort descending


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.6.6. Information... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FileStar/2 is a simple, fast, intuitive and powerful OS/2 file management
utility that all levels of users will find beneficial on their Desktop.  It is
designed to ease the transition for DOS and Windows users migrating to the OS/2
environment, as well as advanced OS/2 users who demand extended control over
their files.  It is not intended to be a replacement for the WPS Drives object,
but rather to provide users with enhanced file management functions that users
frequently use.

FileStar/2 provides a simple interface to your files, combining familiar file
manager concepts with the superior controls available in the OS/2 Presentation
Manager environment.  FileStar/2 uses a two-window approach to viewing
directory contents, with drag and drop capabilities for moving and copying
files between windows and other WPS objects, such as the shredder and printer
objects. Visual feedback on the progress of operations is provided.
Additionally, FileStar/2 employs a convenient point and click method for
specifying paths to perform all common file operations.

FileStar/2 is multithreaded and supports running different operations in its
two windows simultaneously.  For instance, you may copy selected files in one
directory to another directory in one file window while archiving all files in
a third directory in the other file window.  Other operations that do not
require a window, such as formatting a diskette, may be performed concurrently
with file operations.

FileStar/2 has excellent archived file support for InfoZip's ZIP.EXE and
UNZIP.EXE.  These programs support OS/2 Extended Attributes and are compatible
with Version 2 PKZIP compression software.  The InfoZip products are widely
available and are free.  They are included with the program for your
convenience.

FileStar/2 is a copyrighted product of SofTouch Systems, Inc, 1300 South
Meridian, Suite 600, Oklahoma City, OK. 73108, USA.  For sales and support,
phone [phone] or Fax [phone].

All Right Reserved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.6.7. Tips... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section of Help consists of Tips and Techniques for using FileStar/2.
Those users that don't read the Manual or use the online Help should at least
read this section.  It covers some of the less obvious features of FileStar/2.
It will be developed over time as the base of experience grows.

First of all, a word or two about organizing your fixed disks.  While it's
unlikely that anyone will take time and immediately restructure their large
hard disks as suggested herein, at least it should be considered the next time
the task becomes necessary or practicable.

Many systems are set up with an entire physical disk as one volume or logical
disk.  This inherently puts the system at greater risk of losing all data with
one failure.  It's like putting your nest egg in one investment or repeatedly
betting it all at the casinos.  Diversification is far better.  The same goes
for organizing your hard disks.  Divide your disks up into smaller logical
disks and use the different logical disks to categorize the content of each.

By doing so, you'll also find that file managers such as FileStar/2 will be
more nimble and responsive.  Reading in the directories of a hard disk is time
consuming, especially when building a directory tree where elements are added
according to their parent-child relationship.  The number of directories on the
drive being read is the primary factor in the time required.  Unless there are
data requirements for larger volumes, limiting volumes to 100-300 MB will
generally result in better file manager performance and, more importantly, will
limit exposure to "losing it all' in one failure.

If you don't plan on customizing any colors (except the window background
colors), uncheck Save/Restore Colors and Fonts on the Options page of the
notebook for a slightly faster startup time.

Use Text view for speed and to view the maximum numbers of files in the
instantaneous field of view of the window.  Having the cursored file data
available in the Data Panel obviates the need for Details view in many cases.

Reading in Name or Icon views can take much longer than reading the same
directory in Text view.

If you want to see what an icon looks like in Text view, right mouse button
click on it and start to drag it.  Let go of it when you're through.

Experiment with the Custom window arrangement. It's unique but offers the
largest window viewing area with the most convenient way to utilize both
windows.

Use the Size pushbutton on the Data Panel to straighten out the windows if they
get misplaced though some unforseen action.

Use the popup context menus.  Everything may be accomplished from these menus.

      There are popup menus in the Drive, Directory and both File windows.

      The large pushbutton showing the number of files and size at the bottom
      of the File windows is the object to RMB click on for the Window Options
      menu.

      The large pushbutton showing the number of directories at the bottom of
      the Directory window is the hot spot for popping up the Frequent Use
      Directories menu.

      The title bars of both File windows have a popup menu that contains all
      options available on the Action Bar pulldown menu that are not found on
      the other menus.

 Use Multiple Trees for directory copy and move operations. It's easier to
 point and click the destination directory into the dialog when they are all in
 the same window.

 You may have different multiple trees for each window.

 Use the Ctrl key to add multiple trees on the fly.

 When using multiple trees, keep the unused trees collapsed to minimize
 scrolling.

 The F7/F8 keys not only select the File windows; they scroll the window to the
 cursored file and can be used for this purpose even if the window is already
 active.

 Pushing the large pushbutton at the bottom of the Directory Tree window (shows
 the number of directories) alternates the windowed directory between the last
 and current directories.

 The Read All Dirs option is drive specific; it applies only to the drive
 listed at the time it's checked.

 FileStar/2 truncates long file names going from HPFS to FAT drives in much the
 same manner as the WPS. File case is also preserved. The long names and case
 are restored when files are copied or moved from FAT to HPFS drives.

 When copying more files to a floppy than will fit, simply swap floppies when
 the "Disk is full" message appears, then push Overwrite to resume copying the
 selected list to the next floppy.

 You may push "Skip" when the "Disk is full" messages appears in a floppy copy
 to try fitting smaller files on the floppy.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3. Context menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pop-up menus are accessed by clicking on the right mouse button in specified
areas on the display. The location of the context popup menu hot zones is
summarized below;

     Drives window
           -  Drives:  Anywhere within the drives list
     Directories
           -  Directories:  Anywhere within the tree
           -  Freq Dirs:  Last Directory pushbutton, bottom center
           -  Last Dirs:  L and R window select pushbuttons, bottom left and
           right
     File Windows
           -  Files:  Anywhere within the files list
           -  Title Bar:  Within the title bar, either window
           -  Window Options:  Last Filter pushbutton, bottom center
           -  Undelete files:  Anywhere within the deleted files list
     Toolbar window
           -  Toolbar:  Anywhere within the toolbar window
           -  Toolbar dialog:  Over current toolbar
     ZipView window
           -  ZipView  -  Anywhere within the files list
           -  Window Options - Anywhere within the bottom data panel of ZipView
           window

 These popup menus provide access to all FileStar functions and, if the user
 prefers, both the standard menu action bar and Button Bar may be removed from
 the window, thereby providing more useable window area for files and directory
 data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1. Toolbar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Toolbar changes, settings and other configuration items are accessed through a
context popup menu, normally a right mouse click anywhere within the toolbar
window area.  The popup menu has 10 selections of which the last four are item
specific, meaning that these functions apply to the item under the mouse
pointer at the time when the menu was activated.

The first six items, which are not item specific, are:

      Configure... - Activates the Configure Toolbar dialog
      Change Style... - Activates the Set Toolbar Style dialog
      Load Default - Loads the default toolbar
      Load Toolbar... - Loads a toolbar previously saved to a disk file
      Save Toolbar... - Save the current toolbar to the INI file
      Save Toolbar As... - Saves the current toolbar to a disk file.

 The last four menu items are toolbar item specific and apply to the item under
 the mouse pointer when the RMB is clicked:

      Edit Item - Loads toolbar notebook to change item function or bitmap
      Edit Text - Edits the text associated with an item
      Create Item - Loads the toolbar notebook to create a new function or
      bitmap
      Remove Item - Removes the item from the toolbar


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.2. Title Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Title Bar Menu

A RMB click in the title bar of either File Window will popup the Title Bar
menu.  This menu contains items to access all Windows, Prompts, Setup and Help
Action Bar menu items.  It is provided for those users that prefer to hide the
primary Action Bar menu to gain the additional window viewing area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.3. Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Drives context popup menu is activated with a RMB click anywhere within the
drive list. It is identical to the Action Bar Drives submenu and contains the
following menu options (use hypertext link for more help):

     Read All Dirs - Toggles 'Read All Dirs' moding
     Scan Drive - Initiates drive scan of selected drive
     Remap - Remaps drive list
     Filter... - Activates directory filter for selected drive
     Query... - Queries characteristics of selected drive
     Available... - Modify the drives showing list
     Multiple Trees - Toggles Multiple Trees moding
     Add a Drive - Adds drive to Multiple Trees
     Remove a Drive - Removes drive from Multiple Trees
     Check... - Runs PMCHKDSK on selected drive
     Format... - Formats selected drive
     Find File... - Activates fast File Find dialog
     Find Text... - Activates PMSeek program
     WPS Drive - Opens Drives object for selected drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.4. Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Directories context popup menu is activated with a RMB click anywhere
within the directory tree window. It is identical to the Action Bar Directories
submenu and contains the following menu options (use hypertext link for more
help):

     Copy - Copies selected directory
     Move - Moves selected directory
     Rename - Renames selected directory
     Create - Creates subdirectory of selected directory
     Delete - Deletes selected directory
     Zip - Zips selected directory
     Compare - Compares directories of the two windows
     Query - Shows total subdirs/files in selected directory
     Attributes - Show/modify selected directory attributes
     Expand Branch - Fully expand selected directory
     Collapse Branch - Fully collapse selected directory
     Collapse All - Collapses tree(s)
     WPS Folder - Opens selected WPS folder
     Scan Dir - Scans selected directory
     Add Dir - Adds selected directory to multi-dir view
     Read Branch - Scans files in selected directory branch
     Change Dir - activates Change Directory dialog
     Last Dirs - Pops up Last Directories menu
     Freq Dirs - Pops up Freq Dir menu
     Parent Dir - Switches to parent directory
     Last Dir - Switches to last directory


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.5. Frequently Used Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Frequently Used Directories menu consists of 10 directories and is built by
the user using the Set Freq Dirs option at the bottom of the menu.  Selecting a
directory from the menu results in a change to that directory.

The directories in the Freq Dirs menu may be from any drive available to the
system, including removable media disks. If the directory is not found (it may
have been deleted or is not on the current disk in a removable media drive),
the appropriate error message is generated.

The Freq Dirs context menu may be activated with a RMB click on the Last
Directory  pushbutton at the bottom of the Directory window, the Directories
Freq Dirs menu item or the toolbar Freq Dirs pushbutton. The latter is the most
convenient.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.6. Last Used Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Last Used Directories menu is maintained by the program and consists of the
last 10 directories used. Directories are not duplicated if already in the
list.  Selecting a directory from the menu results in a change to that
directory.

The directories in the Last Dirs menu may be from any drive available to the
system, including removable media disks. If the directory is not found (it may
have been deleted or is not on the current disk in a removable media drive),
the appropriate error message is generated.

The Last Dirs context menu may be activated with a RMB click on either of the
Window Switch pushbuttons at the bottom of the Directory window, the
Directories Last Dirs menu item or the toolbar Last Dirs pushbutton. The latter
is the most convenient.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl D


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.7. Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Files context popup menu is identical to the Action Bar Files submenu. It
is activated with a RMB click anywhere within the files list.  It contains the
following menu options (use hypertext link for more help):

     Copy - Copy selected file(s)
     Move - Move selected file(s)
     Delete - Delete selected file(s)
     Zip - Zip selected file(s)
     Unzip - Unzip selected file(s)
     Attributes - Change attributes of selected file(s)
     Date/Time - Change date/time of selected file(s)
     Undelete - Undelete selected file(s)
     Edit - Edit selected file(s)
     Browse - Browse selected file(s)
     Select All with *.ext - Select files with same extension
     Select/deselect All - Select/deselect all files
     Reselect/Invert - Reselect/invert previous/current list
     ZipView - Opens ZipView window of selected zip file
     Execute - Activates the Execute dialog
     Rename - Rename selected file(s)
     Print - Print selected file(s)
     File List - Save/print list of selected files
     Compare - Compare two files
     WPS Object - Open object with default WPS action


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.8. Undelete Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Deleted Files context menu may be activated in any DELETE directory with a
RMB click anywhere within the files area. It contains the following items;

     Undelete - Undeletes selected file(s) from DELETE directory
     Permanent Delete - Permanently deletes file(s) in DELETE directory
     Browse - Browses the selected file
     Select All *.ext - Selects all files with same extension
     Select All - Selects all files in directory
     Reselect/Invert - Reselects or inverts the last selected files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.9. File Window Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Settings specific to each individual File window are accessible through the
Window Options context menu or the Setup submenu located on the Action Bar
Primary Menu.

The Window Options context menu is activated with a RMB click on the Last
Filter  pushbutton at the bottom of each File window.  The keys Ctrl Shift '?'
will also activate the menu.  It contains the following options that are
applicable to the window in which the menu was activated:

     Filter... - Activates the File Filter dialog
     Last Filter - Toggles the last/current file filter
     Select View - Sets the window view
     Selection Type - Sets the type of file selection
     Sort By - Sets the type of file sort used
     Show Subjects - Toggles visibility of subjects in Details view
     Show Longnames - Toggles visibility of longnames in Details view
     Show EA Size - Toggles visibility of files EA size


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.10. ZipView ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The ZipView window context menu is activated with a RMB click anywhere with the
files area.  It contain the following options:

     Unzip to WorkDir - Extracts all files to the WORKDIR directory
     Browse - Browses the selected file
     Add - Activates the Zip Files dialog to add files to the current file
     Extract - Extracts files using the Unzip dialog
     Edit - Edits the selected file
     Delete Deletes the selected files
     Select All - Selects all files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.11. ZipView Window Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The ZipView Window Options context menu is activated with a RMB click in the
window data area at the bottom of the ZipView window.  It contains the
following options:

     Select View - Selects either Text or Details view
     Selection Type - Sets type of file selection used
     Sort By - Sets type of file sort used


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Toolbar Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The configurable toolbar consists of user definable and arrangeable bitmapped
pushbuttons for most all internal control functions.  It is located immediately
below the Action Bar pulldown menu, if it is displayed,  or below the primary
window titlebar if the menu is hidden. It may be hidden from view by
deselecting the Show toolbar option from the Options page of the Settings
notebook or by selecting the 'Hide toolbar' menu option in the Windows pull
down menu.

Default Toolbar, Scrolled Full Left and Right, VGA Resloution

Bubble help is available for the primary items.  It does not function for
submenu items.  However, all functions have associated descriptive help text
and moving a submenu item to the primary menu will show that help.

Toolbar changes, settings and other configuration items are ONLY accessed
through a context popup menu, normally a right mouse click anywhere within the
toolbar window area.

When the toolbar is configured with more pushbuttons than will fit within the
horizontal width of the window, scroll arrows appear at either end to scroll
the toolbar.  Each click of a scroll control moves the toolbar half the width
of the toolbar or to the end, whichever is first.

It may also be scrolled from the keyboard by putting control focus into the
toolbar (press F2 or use ALT+UP arrow to 'window scroll' to the toolbar.  Use
the left and right arrow keys to scroll through the individual items of the
toolbar once it has the focus and Shift left-right arrow keys to scroll with
half window width steps.  The Home and End keys also scroll the toolbar to
either end.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1. Default Toolbar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The default toolbar is graphical and consists of 24 pushbutton menu functions,
of which 4 have drop down submenus consisting of an additional selectable 17
items. Although, by default, most do not have drop down submenu items, any item
may be user configured as such.
Default Toolbar, Scrolled Full Left and Right, VGA Resolution

The default installation also has two predefined optional toolbars that may be
used; one optional toolbar, whose template is stored in the disk file
'text.bar' consists of text type bitmaps and the other, 'embossed.bar' is also
text style pushbuttons but with embossed lettering.  Although these toolbars
are defined as templates in disk files, they are compiled in the executable
program. Altogether, there are 95 internal bitmaps available for use.

In addition, externally defined bitmaps, from bitmaps files, may be used as
desired by the user and the customized toolbar stored on disk as defined by the
user.  The toolbar is not compatible with standard icons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2. Toolbar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The toolbar may be rearranged using standard drag and drop (copy or move) of
items.

Toolbar changes, settings and other configuration items are accessed through a
context popup menu, normally a right mouse click anywhere within the toolbar
window area.  The popup menu has 10 selections of which the last four are item
specific, meaning that these functions apply to the item under the mouse
pointer at the time when the menu was activated.

The first six items, which are not item specific, are:

      Configure... - Activates the Configure Toolbar dialog
      Change Style... - Activates the Set Toolbar Style dialog
      Load Default - Loads the default toolbar
      Load Toolbar... - Loads a toolbar previously saved to a disk file
      Save Toolbar... - Save the current toolbar to the INI file
      Save Toolbar As... - Saves the current toolbar to a disk file.

 The last four menu items are toolbar item specific and apply to the item under
 the mouse pointer when the RMB is clicked:

      Edit Item - Loads toolbar notebook to change item function or bitmap
      Edit Text - Edits the text associated with an item
      Create Item - Loads the toolbar notebook to create a new function or
      bitmap
      Remove Item - Removes the item from the toolbar

 The toolbar may be used with and without text augmentation or as text only.
 It also has 'bubble help' which may be adjusted as to turn on/off delay times
 or turned off once the user no longer needs it. These items are set in the
 Change Style dialog.

 A single click left mouse button click on a button (or pressing Enter while
 the button is cursored) will start the action associated with a button.  If
 the button defined as a submenu, a dropdown toolbar will appear with the
 selectable submenu items. Buttons may be defined as submenus by dragging and
 dropping another button on the button while pressing the ALT key.

 The copy, move, delete and filter actions are window dependent; that is, copy
 initiates a directory copy if the Directory window is active and a file copy
 if either of the File windows is the active window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1. Configure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Configure Toolbar dialog contains all the tools needed to define and
configure a customized toolbar.

The 'Built-in toolbar' shows all internal bitmaps available for use. The
'Current toolbar' is the toolbar to be modified. The user simply drags unwanted
items in the current toolbar to the built-in shredder and new items from the
'Builtin' toolbar to the current toolbar.

You can click on an item in the 'Builtin' toolbar to pop up a message box with
its description.

Placement of a dropped item is to the left or right of the item under the
cursor at drop time, depending on whether the drag pointer was over the left or
right side of the item at drop time.  An item may be moved in the current
toolbar by a simple default drag operation or copied by a CTRL drag operation.
If the ALT key is pressed during a drag operation, the dropped item becomes a
submenu item to the item on which it was dropped.

Blank spacers are available in the 'Builtin' toolbar and may be dragged into
the current toolbar to optionally put space between items as desired.  For
wider space, use more that one spacer, which are 3 pixels in width.  The
'Builtin' blank spacers are not very obvious; one is located to the right of
the 'WPS' bitmap in the above example. Put the mouse cursor over one of these
blank spaces and start a drag operation.  A spacer bitmap will then be visible
during the drag.

On the Configure Toolbar dialog is a check box to toggle the display of the
toolbar item text.  The displayed text is useful while configuring the toolbar;
however, it does not change the current toolbar style when the dialog is
closed.

The toolbar context popup menu may be used from within the dialog (right mouse
click on the current toolbar) to Edit and Create items and perform any of the
menu functions on the current toolbar.

When the dialog is closed, the real toolbar is updated to the configuration of
the current toolbar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.1. Display text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display text Auto-Checkbox dialog item toggles the display of toolbar item
text On and OFF. The displayed text is useful while configuring the toolbar;
however, it does not change the current toolbar style when the dialog is
closed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.2. OK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default OK Push Button dialog item closes the dialog and updates the
toolbar to the configuration of the dialog current toolbar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.3. Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Cancel Push Button dialog item closes the dialog without making changes to
the toolbar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.1.4. Default ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default Push Button dialog item loads the default toolbar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.2. Change Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The style options are;

Frame items

Menu items appear with or without a shadowed frame.

Display text/Text only

The visibility of item text is toggled and if ON, it may be set to 'Text only'.

Display bubble help

The bubble help is toggled ON/OFF.  If set to ON, the time delay before
appearance and the displayed time before disappearance may be set by changing
the appropriate field entries.  The time is entered in milliseconds (e.g. 3 Sec
= 3000).

Autosize

When checked, bitmaps are scaled to their real size.  When unchecked, the
bitmaps may be forced to the size entered in the respective sizing fields.
However, the latter typically results in bitmap degradation. If the item is
smaller, it is centered. If the item is bigger, the bitmap is shrunk.  There
are three shrink modes:

     Ignore - Works best for bitmaps with lots of colors.
     And - Works best for bitmaps with dark drawings on light backgrounds.
     Or - Works best for bitmaps with light drawings on dark backgrounds.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.2.1. Frame items ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A toggle is provided to change the appearance of menu items by showing the
items with or without a shadowed frame.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.2.2. Display text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The visibility of item text may be toggled and if ON, it may be set to 'Text
only'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.2.3. Text only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the visibility of item text is toggled ON, it may be set to 'Text only'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.2.4. Show bubble help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The bubble help may be toggled ON/OFF.  If set to ON, the time delay before
appearance and the display time after appearance may be set by changing the
appropriate field entries.  The time is entered in milliseconds (e.g. 3 Sec =
3000).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.2.5. Delay entry field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the bubble help is toggled ON, the time delay before appearance may be set
by changing the this field.  The time is entered in milliseconds (e.g. 1 Sec =
1000).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.2.6. Display time entry field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the bubble help is toggled ON, the time delay before disappearance may be
set by changing this field.  The time is entered in milliseconds (e.g. 3 Sec =
3000).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.2.7. Autosize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When checked, bitmaps are scaled to their real size.  When unchecked, the
bitmaps may be forced to the size entered in the respective sizing fields.
However, the latter typically results in bitmap degradation. If the item is
smaller, it is centered. If the item is bigger, the bitmap is shrunk.  There
are three shrink modes:

     Ignore - Works best for bitmaps with lots of colors.
     And - Works best for bitmaps with dark drawings on light backgrounds.
     Or - Works best for bitmaps with light drawings on dark backgrounds.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.2.8. Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Cancel Push Button dialog item closes the dialog without making changes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.3. Load Default ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This menu item, Load Default, will load the default toolbar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.4. Load Toolbar... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Load Toolbar... menu item loads a toolbar previously saved to a disk file
using a standard file dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.5. Save Toolbar... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Save Toolbar... menu item saves the current toolbar to the FILESTAR.INI
file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.6. Save Toolbar As... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Save Toolbar As... menu item saves the current toolbar to a disk file. It
then may be reloaded at a later time using the Load Toolbar option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.7. Edit Item... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Item... menu item loads two pages of the toolbar notebook which are
used to change the function or bitmap associated with a toolbar item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.8. Edit Item Text... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Item Text... menu item activates an Edit Item Text dialog that may be
used to simply changed the text displayed for a menu item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.8.1. Edit Item Text Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Text Dialog Box is a simple dialog used to change the text of a
toolbar item that was under the mouse pointer when the dialog was activated.
It has a single entry field in which a user may enter the new text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.8.1.1. Text entry field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the text to be associated with the item that was under the mouse pointer
when this dialog was activated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.9. Create Item... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Create Item... menu item loads all three pages of the toolbar notebook
which are used to create a new toolbar item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.10. Remove Item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The toolbar menu option Remove Item is used to remove an item from the toolbar.
Any toolbar item may also be dragged to the Desktop shredder to remove it.
Don't worry about removing items that are built in toolbar items.  They are
easily replaced using the menu Configure... option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11. Toolbar Notebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The notebook is displayed when you select Create item or Edit item from the
context menu. It will display one or more of the following pages :

     Position
     Action
     General


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.1. NB Page 1_1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can create an item at the End of the toolbar, or Before or After the
current item.

Note:  If you did not display the context menu over an item, you can just chose
End.

If you select the Non selectable item button, the created item will not be
selectable and will just be used as a decoration.

If you select the Spacer button, the created item will be an item without text,
bitmap or frame, which can be used as a separator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.1.1. End ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.1.2. After current ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.1.3. Before current ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.1.4. Regular item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.1.5. Non selectable item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.1.6. Spacer item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.1.7. Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.1.8. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can create an item at the End of the toolbar,  Before or After the current
item.

Note:  If you did not display the context menu over an item, you can just chose
End

If you select the Non selectable item button, the created item will not be
selectable and will just be used as decoration.

If you select the Spacer button, the created item will be an item without text,
bitmap or frame, which can be used as a separator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.2. NB Page 1_2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can chose a function from the Function drop down list. Most of the internal
functions are listed. The chosen function will be executed with the associated
Parameters when the item is selected from the toolbar.

The ExecuteProgram function starts the program given in the Parameters field in
another thread. You must include the full path to the program if it is not
included in the CONFIG.SYS PATH statement.  You may add the following
metacharacters to the command line in the Parameters field:

     %f - pass the cursored filename without a path.
     %F - pass the cursored path and filename.
     %d - pass the selected directory name.
     %D - pass the full selected directory path.
     %V - pass the drive letter with colon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.2.1. Command list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is a drop down list of internal commands available to the user.  The first
item in the list, Execute Program, may be used to run an external executable
program.  It will start the program given in the Parameters field in another
thread. You may add the following metacharacters to the command line in the
Parameters field:

     %f - pass the cursored filename without a path.
     %F - pass the cursored path and filename.
     %d - pass the selected directory name.
     %D - pass the full selected directory path.
     %V - pass the drive letter with colon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.2.2. Command line parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If Execute Program is selected in the Function field, enter the full path of
executable program in this field. You may add the following metacharacters to
the command line in the Parameters field:

     %f - pass the cursored filename without a path.
     %F - pass the cursored path and filename.
     %d - pass the selected directory name.
     %D - pass the full selected directory path.
     %V - pass the drive letter with colon.
     /a  - auto close windowed applications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.2.3. Command description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is a short description of the selected function that will appear in the
'ballon help'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.2.4. Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

No help defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.2.5. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can chose a function from the Function drop down list. Most of the internal
functions are listed. The chosen function will be executed with the associated
Parameters when the item is selected from the toolbar.

The ExecuteProgram function starts the program given in the Parameters field in
another thread. You must include the full path to the program if it is not
included in the CONFIG.SYS PATH statement.  You may add the following
metacharacters to the command line in the Parameters field:

     %f - pass the cursored filename without a path.
     %F - pass the cursored path and filename.
     %d - pass the selected directory name.
     %D - pass the full selected directory path.
     %V - pass the drive letter with colon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3. NB Page 1_3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This page allows you to choose the text and the bitmap of an item. An item must
have at least one of the two.

Title

Enter the text to be displayed with the item if the Show text style is chosen.
An accelerator key can be defined by putting a "~" in front of the chosen
character. The character will be displayed underscored on the item and pressing
on its key while the input focus is on the toolbar will select the item.

Built-in...

Displays a dialog to choose a new bitmap from the set of built-in bitmaps.

Load...

Displays a file dialog to choose a new bitmap from a disk file.

Edit...

If the bitmap comes from a file, starts ICONEDIT to edit it.

Create...

Starts ICONEDIT to create a new bitmap.

Under the bitmap frame is displayed its filename, or its numeric ID if it comes
from the executable file resources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.1. Item title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the text to be displayed with the item if the Show text style is chosen.
An accelerator key can be defined by putting a "~" in front of the chosen
character. The character will be displayed underscored on the item and pressing
on its key while the input focus is on the toolbar will select the item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.2. File specification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.3. No Bitmap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.4. Built-in... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Displays a dialog for the user to choose a new bitmap from the set of built-in
bitmaps.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.5. Load file... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Load file... Push Button dialog item is used to load a bitmap from a disk
file to be used with the toolbar item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.6. Create... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Create... Push Button dialog item loads a Create Bitmap dialog to name and
size a new bitmap and then start the ICONEDIT program to edit the new bitmap.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.7. Edit... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit... Push Button dialog item will start the icon editor and load it with
the current bitmap.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.8. Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

No help defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.9. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This page allows you to choose the text and the bitmap of an item. An item must
have at least one of the two.

Title

Enter the text to be displayed with the item if the Show text style is chosen.
An accelerator key can be defined by putting a "~" in front of the chosen
character. The character will be displayed underscored on the item and pressing
on its key while the input focus is on the toolbar will select the item.

Built-in...

Displays a dialog to choose a new bitmap from the set of built-in bitmaps.

Load...

Displays a file dialog to choose a new bitmap from a disk file.

Edit...

If the bitmap comes from a file, starts iconedit to edit it.

Create...

Starts iconedit to create a new bitmap.

Under the bitmap frame is displayed its filename, or its id if it comes from
the executable file resources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.10. Create Bitmap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Create Bitmap dialog has entry fields for the size and filename for a
bitmap to be created.  Simply fill in the fields and press ok.

The default toolbar bitmaps are defined in both VGA (Independent Color Form
(=VGA)) and XGA/8514 (XGA/8514 - 16 colors) forms with a size of 24x20 pixels
for VGA and 30x25 for XGA/8514.  The text style bitmaps are wider, being 38x20
and 47x25 respectively for the aforementioned resolutions.

The user needs to be aware of these sizes if he/she intends to define custom
bitmaps of the same size. However the toolbar will automatically adjust to
bitmaps sized up to 100 pixels.  The default size is a compromise between use
of Window area and adequate graphical resolution for recognition of the
function.

How To Make a Bitmap From an Icon

One method that may be used to semi-copy icons to bitmaps follows.  The
difficulty in this conversion depends a great deal on the clear background
component of the icon.  You may use this method to create bitmaps for use with
the executable programs function.  This will result in 32x32 pixel bitmaps
which are larger than those used in the primary bar.  The enlarged size however
is not a problem for drop down submenu items.  In fact, some of the drop down
bitmaps provided (examples are the font and color palette bitmaps) are 32x32
copies of icons.

Users are encouraged to share any bitmaps they create with SofTouch Systems,
Inc. who will make them generally available to other users or, optionally,
include them with future updates/releases of the program.

Getting started

You must first select an icon to edit.  If you are trying to copy a program's
icon, the best place to start is on the General page of the program object
settings notebook.  Selecting Edit will open the icon editor in an icon mode.
Optionally, you may select any *.ICO file with FileStar, then select edit to
open the icon editor on that file.

Copying  the icon

From the Icon Editor menu, select Edit->Select All, then Edit->Copy.  Now pull
down the Files menu and select New....  In the New dialog, select Bitmap, 32x32
size.  A blank bitmap is created in bitmap mode.  Now select Edit->Paste to
paste the icon copy in the bitmap.

Editing the bitmap

After a successful copy, all that  is left is touch up.  How much of that there
is to do depends on the transparency of the icon.  The transparent parts of the
icon are copied into the bitmap as black.  You must 'fill' (Tools->Color Fill)
the background area of the bitmap with Pale Gray (204x204x204 RGB) to blend
into the FileStar toolbar. This copy process is seldom perfect.  Generally you
will need to do some touch up editing of individual pixels.

One problem with some icons will be filling unwanted areas with black during
the copy.  You may anticipate this by observing the outline of the icon and
blocking any undesirable black fill paths with a different color.

Saving the bitmap

Save the bitmap as 'Independent Small Color Form' and v2.0 format.  You may now
use this bitmap with any function by associating it with a menu item.  Right
mouse click on the item, select Edit, select the edit notebook General page,
select Load file..., load the file and close the notebook.  The loaded file
bitmap should be displayed in the General page bitmap viewing area with its
path and name displayed below the viewing area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.10.1. Width ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the desired width of the bitmap to be created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.10.2. Height ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the desired height of the bitmap to be created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.10.3. Filename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the filename of the bitmap to be created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.10.4. OK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pushing the default OK Push Button dialog item will create the bitmap.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2.11.3.10.5. Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Cancel Push Button dialog item will close the dialog without creating a
bitmap.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3. Help Button Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When the Help Button Bar is displayed, the following pushbutton functions are
available:

 Opens the Help Index window.

 Displays the General Help window.

 Displays the Help Contents window.

 Opens a help window that describes the keyboard interface and Accelerator
keys.

 A short description of the help system.

 Opens a useful tips help section.

 An short description of FileStar/2.

 Replaces the Help Button Bar with the Toolbar.

Accelerator Keys - Alt H


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.1. Tips ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Tips pushbutton opens the Tips section of the FILESTAR.HLP file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.2. Product Info ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Product Info pushbutton opens the Product Info section of the FILESTAR.HLP
file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3.3. Exit Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Exit Help pushbutton deactivates the Help Button Bar and shows the Toolbar
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Drives Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Drive window displays the drives available on your system, including floppy
drives, hard disk volumes and CD ROM drives. Double clicking with the LMB
selects a drive and displays the volume directory tree in the Directory window
and current directory contents in a File window.  If Multiple Trees are in use,
the drive list will show all the drives that are currently in the Directory
Window and available without a drive scan.  In that case, a single click on a
drive will select that drive as the active device and cause the current
directory to be selected in the appropriate tree.

The drive map is rescanned with each directory and window change, which ensures
that it is up to date for network use.  A forced remap is commanded by
selecting Remap from the Drives menu.

The drive list is also used to select the drive for menu functions by single
clicking with the left mouse button on the desired drive.These functions are
available without changing to that drive.

In the example shown below, drives F:, I: and K: are in memory and displayed in
the Directory window with the active drive being drive I:.

Drive Window Example

There are identical popup and pulldown menus for the Drive Window. A single
click with the right mouse button anywhere in the Drives window will display
the popup menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1. Drives Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Action Bar Drives submenu and the Drives context popup menu are identical.
The Drives context popup menu is activated with a RMB click anywhere within the
Drives window. They contains the following menu options (use hypertext link for
more help):

     Read All Dirs - Toggles 'Read All Dirs' moding
     Scan Drive - Initiates drive scan of selected drive
     Remap - Remaps drive list
     Filter... - Activates directory filter for selected drive
     Query... - Queries characteristics of selected drive
     Available... - Modify the drives showing list
     Multiple Trees - Toggles Multiple Trees moding
     Add a Drive - Adds drive to Multiple Trees
     Remove a Drive - Removes drive from Multiple Trees
     Check... - Runs Check Disk on selected drive
     Format... - Formats selected drive
     Find File... - Activates fast File Find dialog
     Find Text... - Activates PMSeek program
     WPS Drive - Opens Drives object for selected drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2. Directory Filters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Directory Filter dialog is accessed by selecting the Filter... option in
the Drives menu.  Directory filters settings are for individual drives and you
must select the drive desired before you activate the filter dialog.  The
filters settings are applied only to the drive that was highlighted when the
menu option was selected.  In other words, each drive has its own set filter
options. The drive is shown in the dialog title bar.

There are options to set two search parameters, the attributes filter to be
used in a directory search and how the tree is to be sorted.

 Exclude Files Check Box -
                          When checked, files are excluded in a directory
                          search, resulting in faster operation.  However, on
                          some systems, such as Banyan network drives, a search
                          without files is not supported.

 Fast Find Check Box -
                          When checked, the directories are searched until
                          finding a prefixed number before updating the tree,
                          resulting in a faster tree build.  Uncheck this item
                          if used on a network that does not support a batch
                          find.

 Include Radio Buttons -
                          For fastest operation, do not include any more of the
                          R/O, Hidden, System or Archived attributes than
                          required for your system.  The default has been set
                          to include all.

 Sort By Radio Buttons -
                          Provides to option to not sort or sort the tree
                          alphabetically.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2.1. Exclude Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When checked, files are excluded in a directory search, resulting in faster
operation.  However, on some systems, such as Banyan network drives, a search
without files is not supported.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2.2. Fast Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When checked, the directories are searched until finding a prefixed number
before updating the tree, resulting in a faster tree build.  Uncheck this item
if used on a network that does not support a batch find.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2.3. R/O ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If R/O is checked, directories with this attribute are included in the
directory tree, otherwise they are not.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2.4. Hidden ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If Hidden is checked, directories with this attribute are included in the
directory tree, otherwise they are not.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2.5. System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If System is checked, directories with this attribute are included in the
directory tree, otherwise they are not.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2.6. Archived ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If Archived is checked, directories with this attribute are included in the
directory tree, otherwise they are not.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2.7. Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the Name radio button is selected, the directory tree is sorted by name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2.8. None ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the None radio button is selected, the directory tree is unsorted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2.9. Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set pushbutton sets the directory filter in accordance with the selected
options.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2.10. Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Cancel pushbutton closes the dialog without changing the directory filter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.3. Available Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Available Drives dialog shows all drives on the system and the drive type
reported by the system.  It's primary purpose is to allow the user to remove
selected drives from the drive list in the Drive window.

Only the checked drives will be displayed in the Drive window.  Check, or
uncheck, the appropriate drives as desired.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.3.1. Close ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Close pushbutton closes the dialog and sets the available drives as
checked.  Only those drives checked will show in the Drives window list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.4. Multiple Trees ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Multiple drives may be displayed in the Directory window, shortening access
time and allowing drag and drop operations across partitions.  To display
multiple drives, select the Multiple Trees option from the Drives menu, then
double click with the left mouse button on any drive letter.  Alternately, if
the Multiple Trees option is deselected, you may depress the Ctrl key and
double click with the left mouse button on a drive to add the drive to the
Directory window.

There are menu options in the Drives menu to:

     Add a drive
     Remove a drive
     Restore the last trees used.
     Restore the last trees used on startup.

 All selected drives are highlighted in the drive list and are displayed in the
 title bar of the Directory window.

 The active drive is highlighted with with a white foreground and black
 background; inactive drives are highlighted with a white foreground and cyan
 background.  Single clicking with the left mouse button on any highlighted
 drive letter selects the drive as the active drive.

 To remove drives from the Directory window, select the desired drive with a
 single mouse click with the left mouse button, then select the Remove X:
 option from the Drive menu, where x represents the drive to be removed from
 the Directory window. You may also use Ctrl Shift Enter or LMB double click on
 a drive to remove it.  If the Ctrl+click method was used to add trees to the
 Directory window, double clicking with the left mouse button on a drive will
 remove all drives other than the selected drive from the Directory window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5. Drive Operations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following operations may be performed on drives:

     Γûá Format  (using PMFORMAT)
     Γûá Check Disk  (using PMCHKDSK)
     Γûá Query  (disk and media characteristics)
     Γûá Find  (all files matching mask)
     Γûá Seek  (using PMSEEK)
     Γûá Open WPS Drives


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1. Query Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Disk drive and media characteristics may be queried by clicking with the left
mouse button on the desired drive letter, then selecting Query from the Drives
menu or using Ctrl Shit Q from the keyboard.  The action invokes a dialog which
displays the following information:


 Type of File System  File system driver name (FAT, HPFS,
                      CDFS, etc.).

 Device Description   Type of drive (Floppy, Fixed Disk,
                      etc.).

 Device Location      Remote or local.

 Removable Media      Yes (floppies, etc.) or NO (Fixed Disk).

 Total Space - Bytes  Disk space in bytes.

 Volume Label         Volume label (if labeled).

 Change Detection     Indicates whether or not the drive
                      detects removable media changes.

 Support for > 16MB   Indicates whether or not your disk
                      system uses RAM greater than 16 MB.

 Media                Media data.
 Characteristics

Pushing the Edit Label pushbutton allows you to edit the disk Volume label.  In
the edit mode, the pushbutton is relabeled Save Label. Pushing the Save Label
pushbutton saves an edited disk Volume label.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.1. Edit Label ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pushing the Edit Label pushbutton allows you to edit the disk Volume label.  In
the edit mode, the pushbutton is relabeled Save Label.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.2. Volume Label ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Volume label window shows the current disk Volume label.  The label may be
edited by pushing the Edit Label pushbutton, entering a new label (11
characters maximum) and then pushing the pushbutton, now labeled Save Label,
again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.3. Save Label ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pushing the Save Label pushbutton saves an edited disk Volume label.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.4. Location ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.5. Removeable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.6. File System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.7. Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.8. Total Space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.9. Change Detection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.10. 16MB Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.11. Number of Root Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.12. Number of File Allocation Tables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.13. Bytes/Sector ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.14. Sectors/Cluster ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.15. Reserved Sectors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.16. Sectors/Track ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.17. Number of Sectors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.18. Sectors/FAT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.19. Number of Cylinders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.20. Number of Heads ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.21. Number of Hidden Sectors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.1.22. Number of Large Sectors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.2. Check Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Check from the Drives menu will launch the Presentation Manager check
disk (CHKDSK.EXE) program, an OS/2 utility distributed with the operating
system which checks the selected drive for file system errors.  If the "Write
Corrections to Disk" option is checked, the program must have access to all
files on the drive and there can be no running processes accessing the drive.

The PMCHKDSK.EXE executable program must be located in a directory included in
the PATH statement of the CONFIG.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.3. Format Disk ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Format from the Drives menu will launch the Presentation Manager
formatting program, an OS/2 utility distributed with the operating system used
to format drives. This program may be used to format both floppy and hard
drives.

The PMFORMAT.EXE executable file must be located in a directory included in the
PATH statement of the CONFIG.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.4. File Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A search of selected drives for files matching a mask may be performed by using
the File Find dialog. At the end of the search, the user may easily change to
the directory containing the found file. To initiate a search, the File Find
dialog is displayed by selecting File Find from the Drives menu, find on the
Toolbar, or pressing Alt + F.

From the dialog, select the drives to search. The available drives are
displayed in a list; more than one drive may be selected. A check box is
provided to rapidly selected all fixed disks.  Enter a filename or mask in the
Find Criteria entry field.  Push the Find pushbutton to initiate the search.

At the conclusion of the search, all files found matching the criteria are
displayed in a list which includes the path.  The total number of matches is
also shown.  Pushing the Clear pushbutton (which appears when the search is
complete) erases the list if another search is desired. Double clicking on any
directory path displayed in the list, even while the search is proceeding, will
log the directory into the active file window.  Double clicking on any file
will log the directory into the active file window with the file highlighted.

The dialog is not destroyed between use in a session unless you minimize the
program. This means that when activated on second use, it will have the
previously found files still listed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.4.1. Find Entry Field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter a filename or mask in the Find Criteria entry field. Push the Find
pushbutton to initiate the search. The entry field supports normal wildcard
patterns.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.4.2. Drive List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the drive(s) to include in the search.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.4.3. All Fixed Disks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This check box is provided to rapidly select all fixed disks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.4.4. Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Find button starts the find search.  The search may be interrupted at any
time by pushing this same button which is relabeled Stop during search.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.4.5. Close ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Close pushbutton closes the dialog but the dialog is not destroyed unless
you minimize the program.  You may recall the dialog and reuse the found list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.4.6. Found List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the list of files found.

You may double click on a file and the program will switch to that files
directory and highlight the file.

You may double click on a directory and the program will switch to that
directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.4.7. Clear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton clears the list of files found. You may wish to do this if
searching for a different file pattern.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.5. PMSeek ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 An interface to the OS/2 utility program PMSEEK.EXE is provided. It is
accessible through the Drives menu. This program can quickly search one or more
disks for files or text.  When a file match is found, it is displayed in a
Files found list box.  You can open or run the selected file.  You can also
process commands (such as COPY, ERASE, or RENAME) against the selected file.
When text is found, it is displayed above the file name in a Files found list
box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5.6. Open WPS Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A WPS Drive objects may be easily accessed by holding down the ALT key and LMB
double clicking (or keyboard Enter) on a drive letter in the drive list. The
default view of the Drives object is opened. Other views, as well as the object
Settings notebook, may be opened through cascaded WPS menu options in the
Drives menus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. Directories Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Directory window contains the directory tree(s) for the currently logged
drives. The directory tree associated with the active File window is displayed.
Activating the recessive file window displays the directory tree associated
with the recessive File window. The title bar displays the drive list for the
drive(s) currently displayed in the window.  In the example below, the window
has multiple trees (3) in it and is color coded to indicate it is associated
with the blue File window.

Directory Window

A left mouse button single click, or keyboard arrow scroll, highlights a
directory but does not cause a directory change.  In this manner, directories
other than the current directory may be selected for others various menu
selections.  The context popup or action bar menu selections are therefore
applicable to the selected directory, and not necessarily the current directory
displayed in the active file window.

Located at the bottom of the Directory window is a Last Directory pushbutton
which shows the number of directories currently read into the active tree.

A RMB click anywhere in the tree will pop up the context menu and is the
recommended way to do menuselections.

The Directory window cannot be moved, but may be resized in the up, down and
right directions.  Double clicking the left mouse button in the title bar will
expand the window to the horizontal size of the FileStar/2 Window.  Another
double click will restore it to normal.  The window may be expanded and
restored only; it will not minimize.

The directory tree is not fully expanded by default.  Expandable directories
are indicated with  if collapsed and  if expanded.  A single mouse click on any
or  will expand/collapse that directory. When a directory is expanded, that
branch is fully scanned and the tree is updated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1. Directories Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Directories Action Bar and context popup menus are identical. They contains
the following menu options (use hypertext link for more help):

     Copy - Copies selected directory
     Move - Moves selected directory
     Rename - Renames selected directory
     Create - Creates subdirectory of selected directory
     Delete - Deletes selected directory
     Zip - Zips selected directory
     Compare - Compares directories of the two windows
     Query - Shows total subdirs/files in selected directory
     Attributes - Show/modify selected directory attributes
     Expand Branch - Fully expand selected directory
     Collapse Branch - Fully collapse selected directory
     Collapse All - Collapses tree(s)
     WPS Folder - Opens selected WPS folder
     Scan Dir - Scans selected directory
     Add Dir - Adds selected directory to multi-dir view
     Read Branch - Scans files in selected directory branch
     Change Dir - activates Change Directory dialog
     Last Dirs - Pops up Last Directories menu
     Freq Dirs - Pops up Freq Dir menu
     Parent Dir - Switches to parent directory
     Last Dir - Switches to last directory


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2. Expanding/Collapsing Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The directory tree initially displays only two levels of subdirectories by
default. To view deeper levels of subdirectories it is necessary to expand the
directory tree. Expandable directories contain subdirectories, and are
indicated on the display with an expand indicator button captioned with a , or
a collapse indicator button captioned with a  if already expanded. A single
mouse click on the expand indicator button or collapse indicator button
preceding a directory will expand/collapse that directory one level.

When a directory is expanded, it may be set to auto-scroll and reposition so
that the expanded directories are within the window view.  Set the Auto scroll
tree on expand option ON (default) in the Settings notebook, Options page 2_1
to enable this feature.  If the number of directories in the expanded branch is
greater than the number that can be instantenously viewed, the branch parent is
positioned two directories below the top of the window.

Expanding and collapsing directories may also be performed by selecting the
Expand  option from the Directory menu, or with the hot keys for Expand (+) or
Collapse (-).  These functions differ from the related indicator button
actions,  and  , expanding or collapsing all subdirectories in the branch,
while clicking on the Expand or Collapse indicator button in the display
expands/collapses the directory only one level.

Note if new directories are created outside FileStar/2 (such as an install
program might do), the parent directory may be expanded to reread just that
branch for a tree update without rereading the entire drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2.1. Collapsing All Trees ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The directories menu item Collapse Trees (or Ctrl Shift -)collapses all trees
in the Directory window.  This action is especially useful when multiple trees
are displayed and you want to quickly find the root directory of a particular
drive for re-expansion.

If Multiple Trees is selected and a drive tree is collapsed, a single click on
the drive letter in the Drive window will re-expand that drive tree as well as
select it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3. Directory Window Controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are three pushbuttons at the bottom of the Directory window. These
pushbuttons are used as follows;

     Last Directory - Toggles between last and current directories
     File Window 1 - Selects File window 1
     File Window 2 - Selects File window 2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3.1. Last Directory Pushbutton ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

At the bottom of the Directory window is a Last Directory  pushbutton which is
labeled with the current number of directories in the active tree.

Two levels of directories are initially read by FileStar/2.  As you use
directories, additional levels will be added to the tree. If you wish to know
the total number of directories on a drive, perform a Query on the root
directory of the desired volume, or select the Read All Dirs option from the
Directory menu.  The number of directories displayed has no brackets if it
represents less than the total number of directories.  There will be square
brackets displayed if the drive read was for all directories.

Clicking with the RMB on the Last Directory pushbutton will popup the Frequent
Directories (Freq Dir) menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3.2. Select File Window A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton selects File Window 1.

Although the file windows may be activated by simply clicking anywhere within
the desired window, there are some dual window operations where the use of this
button is either more desirable or required.  The pushbutton also serves as an
object for point and click operations: a RMB click will pop up the Last
Directories (Last Dir) menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3.3. Select File Window B ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton selects File Window 2.

Although the file windows may be activated by simply clicking anywhere within
the desired window, there are some dual window operations where the use of this
button is either more desirable or required.  The pushbutton also serves as an
object for point and click operations: a RMB click will pop up the Last
Directories (Last Dir) menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4. Changing Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Upon startup, FileStar/2 displays the directory contents of the directories
passed as command line or program object parameters.  If there are none, it
will read in the last used directories of the last session.

Directories are normally changed by double clicking with the LMB with the
pointer located on the desired directory.

You may highlight a directory and select Scan Dir from the Directories menu.

You may quickly move up the directory tree from subdirectory to parent by
clicking with the left mouse button on the parent directory button  (double
dots) located at the bottom right of either file window.

You may quickly select the last directory used in a window (assuming there has
been one in the current session) by clicking the Last Directory pushbutton at
the bottom of the Directory window.

You may select any of the last ten directories used in both windows by
accessing the Last Used Directories menu.

You may select a directory from a user generated and maintained list of ten
frequent use directories by accessing the Frequent Use Directories menu.

You may use the Change Directory dialog to change directories using the
keyboard.  This dialog does a tree search as you type a directory name in an
entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4.1. Change Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directories may also be changed by invoking the Change Directory dialog.  This
is accomplished by selecting the Change Dir option from the Directory menu, or
pressing F3 or /.  The Change Directory dialog appears:

As you enter a subdirectory name in the Change To field, the first existing
subdirectory in any of the drives displayed in the directory window which
matches the entered characters in alphabetical order appears in the Match
field. The search is by directory name, not by path.

If more than one subdirectory uses the same name (in different directories),
subsequent directories may be found by pressing the Next pushbutton.  When the
desired directory is displayed, press the Enter pushbutton to change to that
directory.

The search is conducted of the tree contents, not the drive.  It is possible,
therefore, that the directory being searched for has not been read into the
tree due to a partial scan. In that case, no match will be found although the
directory may very well be on a drive in the tree.  Directory branches are
fully read in when a directory is selected. Therefore, if you search for a
second level parent directory of the desired directory, it will be read in and
then the search should be successful for the desired directory.  Of course, you
can select the Read All Dirs option from the Directory menu to read all
directories into the tree.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4.1.1. Change Directory Entry Field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4.1.2. Next ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4.1.3. Change To Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4.2. FreqDirs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directories which are frequently used may be stored and accessed quickly via
the Frequent Directories menu.

Up to ten directories may be stored.  Clicking with the left mouse button on a
listed directory reads the selected directory into the active file window.  If
the drive of the selected directory is not in the Directory window, the drive
will be scanned and displayed.  If there is more than one drive tree already in
the window, it will be added to the existing trees regardless of the status of
the Multiple Trees option.

To access the Frequent Directories menu, select the Freq Dir option from the
Directory menu, press Ctrl+F, or click with the right mouse button on the
information panel at the bottom of the Directory window.

To add, change or replace directories in the list, select the Set Freq Dirs
option from the bottom of the Frequent Use Directories menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4.2.1. Set Frequently Used Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the desired directory from the Directory window using a single click of
the left mouse button.

Select the desired location on the list for the directory you wish to add;
there are ten entry fields.  You may select a currently listed directory for
replacement, if desired.

Press the Replace button to replace an entry.  Press Insert to insert the entry
between existing entries.

You may remove a directory by selecting the directory in the dialog and
pressing the Remove pushbutton.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4.2.1.1. Replace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Replace Non-Specific Dialog Control  (subtype: PUSHBUTTON) dialog item...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4.2.1.2. Remove ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Remove Non-Specific Dialog Control  (subtype: PUSHBUTTON) dialog item...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4.2.1.3. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help Non-Specific Dialog Control  (subtype: PUSHBUTTON) dialog item...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4.3. Last Used Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Last Directories menu maintains a list of the previous ten directories the
user has selected.

Select the desired directory from the Directory window using a single click of
the left mouse button.

Select the desired location on the list for the directory you wish to add;
there are ten entry fields.  You may select a currently listed directory for
replacement, if desired.

Press the Replace button to replace an entry.  Press Insert to insert the entry
between existing entries.

You may remove a directory by selecting the directory in the dialog and
pressing the Remove pushbutton.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.5. Multiple Directory Views ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Multi-directory (multi-folder) views provide a unique and powerful way to
manipulate files. In general, this is a capability to add one or more
directories to the same file window and then manipulate them as if they were in
the same directory.  There is a current limitation that prevents any drag and
drop from a window that has multiple directories in it. Otherwise, most menu
operations are permitted.

When coupled with the filtering capability provided, it is easy to put all
files matching a wild card filter, such as *.zip;*.bak;<1-1-95 (all zip and bak
files dated before 1-1-95) from any combined directories in one window and
delete, copy, move, etc. any or all of them. The uses for this capability are
many and include searching for files matching a wildcard pattern. While it may
be slightly slower that the builtin File Find function, the results of the
search are presented in a semi-normal window where the matched files may be
manipulated in any way desired.

Another use is to easily backup files from a branch containing your working
directories to a backup directory, especially when used in conjunction with the
builtin Directory Compare function. All that is necessary to perform a backup
is to do a branch read, with appropriate concatenated filters to keep from
reading a lot of unnecessary files, and then do a multi-directory compare with
the single backup directory and update the files newer than or as appropriate.
This is a three or four key click process.

Combining directories is very easy. To add a directory to a multi-directory
view, double click on the directory of choice in the tree while holding down
the Ctrl key.  The data window at the bottom of the tree will say 'Add
directory' while the Ctrl key is down.  You may also select 'Add dir' from the
directory tree popup menu or the Directories pull down menu and eliminate the
need to use the modifier keys.

To display an entire directory branch, double click on the directory of choice
in the tree while holding down the Ctrl and Shift keys.  The data window at the
bottom of the tree will say 'Add branch' while the Ctrl-Shift key combination
is pressed. You may also select 'Add branch' from the directory tree popup menu
or the Directories pull down menu and eliminate the need to use the modifier
keys. The directory file search recurses through the branch adding all files
that match the filter to the window.  If a branch search is desired it must be
done first.  You may add individual directories to the  results of a branch
search but not vice-versa.

To display the entire drive contents, perform a branch read on the root
directory of a drive to load all the files on the drive into the same window.
You should use a filter if possible to prevent possibly loading thousands of
files. However the program is capable of finding/loading about a thousand
files/sec on a Pentium 133 system.

To display the contents of an entire system in a window, you must first add
multiple drives to the tree window. See Multiple Trees for how to do this.
Then add each drive to the multi-directory (and now multi-drive) view through
the process described above for adding a drive to the view.  The limitation of
adding multiple branches does not apply to multiple drives.

You may release the modifier keys once the read has commenced. Any
multi-directory view has the window titlebar re-colored to white foreground on
a red background.  These colors are not optional or user definable.

A single directory scan will reset the mode to normal.

This method of control provides extreme simplicity and flexibility over what is
added to a multi-directory view.

Once you have multiple directories (or drives) in the same window, the obvious
question is how do you tell what directory a file resides in.  The unique
moding of makes this easy. The directory of the cursored file is shown in the
titlebar of the window and, as you move the cursor around in the window, the
directory of the cursored file is also the highlighted directory in the
directory tree. Directory tree branches are expanded as necessary to see the
correct directory for the cursored file.

If an icon view is in use when reading a branch is commenced, it is switched
automatically to text view for better performance.  The icons are not loaded
because of the extra memory resources and performance penalty that might be
required to view an entire drive in Icon view.  The user may select the view of
choice after the read has finished via the simple Click and View moding. As in
all other cases, use of the icon views (Name and Icon) is not recommended for
performance and resource reasons unless viewing the icons is necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6. Directory Operations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The dialogs to Copy, Move, Delete, Zip, Rename and Create directories share a
common action design.  The dialog window is always in the foreground, and is
launched by selecting the function desired from the menu.  The Copy, Move and
Delete pushbuttons on the Toolbar will also launch these dialogs if the
directory window is the active window.  The Copy, Move and Zip directory
dialogs are identical in operation to the Copy, Move and Zip file dialogs.

All the above dialogs support point and click selection of the target directory
for copy, move and zip functions, the directory on which the operation is to be
performed in the case of delete and rename, and the parent directory for a
create directory operation. The target directory may be selected by selecting
any directory in the Directory window or, to select the directory displayed in
either file window, by clicking with the left mouse button on the file window
containing the directory.  The target directory may be selected in this manner
while the dialog is in the foreground.

The Create, Rename and Delete dialogs have an Auto Close option, available on
the dialog itself, to automatically close the dialog upon completion of an
operation. The dialog remains open until it is specifically closed to
facilitate multiple operations if the Auto Close option is disabled.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.1. Copy/Move Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directories may be copied or moved to any other directory on any drive
available.  To copy or move a directory, it is best to read the target drive
into the same tree Window 1s the source drive using the multiple trees option
or by holding down the Ctrl keys while double clicking on the drive letter.
Then select the directory to be moved or copied, click on Copy or Move in the
Directory menu or Button Bar, to initiate the action. A directory copy or move
dialog will appear.

Set the target parent directory by clicking on that directory in the
appropriate tree or type in the full path.  Alternatively the second window may
be set to the target directory, which will update the dialog target path.

Press Copy or Move in the dialog to initiate the action. A message will appear
notifying the user that the action is in progress.  The Drive, Directory and
File Windows are locked while the operation is in progress to insure the
integrity of the operation.  A message box similar to the one below will be
present during the operation to indicate the ongoing activity.

See Directory Operations for further discussion on using the dialogs to perform
directory operations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.2. Zip ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To archive the contents of a directory (including subdirectories), select the
directory in the tree and select Zip from the Directory menu.  The Zip
Directory dialog will appear.  You may change the selected directory after the
dialog appears.

The target directory is shown in the To field.  Use point and click selection
of the target path using a directory tree or type in the target directory path.
Then edit the target file name for the file that will be created. Press Zip to
start the zip operation.

You may modify the zip options by pressing Options on the dialog and selecting
the desired options or directly editing the options string.

See Directory Operations for further discussion on using the dialogs to perform
directory operations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.3. Delete Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a directory, select the directory to be deleted, then select the
Delete option from the Directory menu or press the delete button on the
Toolbar.  The Delete Directory dialog will appear.

There are three buttons associated with deleting a directory: Delete, Del *.*,
and Del Branch.  They are activated automatically depending on the detected
existence of files and/or subdirectories in the selected directory. If the
directory is empty, the Delete button is enabled.  If the directory contains
files (but no subdirectories), the Del *.* button is enabled and a warning that
the directory contains files is displayed. If the directory contains
subdirectories, the Del Branch button is enabled and a warning that the
directory contains subdirectories is displayed. Pushing the Del Branch button
will delete the directory along with its files and subdirectories (if any).

Directories may be deleted without the dialog if the Confirm Directory Delete
option is deselected in the Settings notebook. However, if the directory
contains files or subdirectories, an interactive message window will still
appear, warning that files and/or directories will be deleted, allowing
abortion of the operation.

See Directory Operations for further discussion on using the dialogs to perform
directory operations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.3.1. Delete Directories Entry Field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The directory shown in this field will be deleted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.3.2. Auto Close ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If this check box is checked, the dialog will auto close when a Delete button
is pushed.  Otherwise, it will remain open for continued use until the Close
button is used to close it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.3.3. Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton deletes empty directories.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.3.4. Del *.* ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton deletes a directory that has no subdirectories but has files in
it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.3.5. Del Branch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton deletes a directory that has subdirectories and possibly files
in it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.4. Create/Rename Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To rename a directory, select the desired directory in the Directory Window and
select Rename from the Directory menu or press Ctrl+N.  The Rename Directory
dialog will appear.  Edit the name as desired and press the rename pushbutton.
You may click on any other directory while the Rename Directory dialog is
displayed to facilitate renaming other directories.

Creating a Directory

The dialog used to create directories as the same as the rename dialog.  A
directory is created by selecting the desired parent directory and entering the
name of the directory to be created in the Create field of the Rename/Create
Directory dialog. The dialog is accessed by selecting the Create (or Rename)
option from the Directory menu.

Push the create button to create the directory. The name is validated for the
type of file system (FAT or HPFS).

See Directory Operations for further discussion on using the dialogs to perform
directory operations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.4.1. Create Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the name of the directory to be created in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.4.2. Auto Close ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If this check box is checked, the dialog will auto close when either Rename or
Create is pushed.  Otherwise, it will remain open for continued use until the
Close button is used to close it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.4.3. Rename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Push to rename the directory as entered in the 'Rename selected directory'
field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.4.4. Create ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Push to create a directory as entered in the 'Create directory' field. The
parent directory is indicated in the 'Selected directory' field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.4.5. Selected Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is initialized with the selected directory.  You may change
directories by clicking on a different directory.  In Rename mode, this will be
the new name.  In create mode, this is the parent directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5. Compare Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This function is selected from either the  directory window popup or pulldown
menus, the key combination of Ctrl =  or from the toolbar. It compares the
contents of the active file window to that of the inactive window. The two
windows may contain single or multi-directory views, i.e. two similar branches
may be compared.  The following automatic changes occur to the configuration
and are restored to normal when the comparison dialog window is closed;

      - The window style is changed to twin side by-side windows, enlarged to
      occupy the entire center window area.

       - The selection mode is changed to 'Multiple' selection to provide a
      click and scroll mode which synchs the clicked on file with the compared
      to file in the opposite window.

       - The details view is selected since it is the appropriate view for this
      purpose.

 Once a directory compare is initiated, the configuration changes are effected
 and a comparison dialog window is presented.  The comparison dialog window has
 fields showing the directories being compared and the current status of that
 comparison, whether it is in progress or the final result of matches found, in
 number of files and total matched file sizes.

 When a comparison is complete, all files that matched the comparison criteria
 are highlighted in both windows except for a 'different name' comparison.  In
 a different name comparison, the files that do not have a matching name in the
 right window are highlighted in the left window.

 The dialog controls allow for swapping windows, changing directories,
 commencing an copy update or changing comparison criteria and recomparing.
 Either file window may be manually scrolled to a particular file of interest
 and clicked on, which causes the opposite window to vertically scroll to match
 the two files horizontally if the windows have scrolling range to do so.

 The comparison criteria provided are identical names and/or sizes,
 same/newer/later last write date/times and different names and/or sizes.  A
 binary compare capability is not included and is grayed out on the dialog.

 File name comparison on FAT drives is based on the longname EA if one exists,
 making comparisons between FAT and HPFS file system directories  that use
 longnames possible (and possibly a first).

 If the directory compare function does not meet your requirements and you have
 a program that does, you may add it to the External Programs list in the
 configuration notebook.  It may be easily invoked using the keystroke
 combination of Ctrl Alt =.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.1. Same Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check to include filename as a compare parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.2. Different Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When checked, the comparison is made on a difference in filenames.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.3. Same Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check to include same file size as a compare parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.4. Different Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check to include a difference in file size as a compare parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.5. Ignore Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check to ignore file size as a compare parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.6. Newest Date/Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check to use newest file date and time as a compare parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.7. Oldest Date/Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check to use oldest file date and time as a compare parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.8. Same Date/Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check to include same file date and time as a compare parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.9. Ignore Date/Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check to include ignore file date and time as a compare parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.10. Compare ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Push to start a comparison of the files in the directory of the left window,
compared to the directory in the right window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.11. Swap Dirs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton will swap the two windows so that the comparisons will be
reversed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.12. Chg Dirs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton will pop the Drives and Directories windows on top of the left
window so that they may be used to change drives and or directories.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.13. Update ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton will start a copy operation.  You may use the context menu for
either file window to perform other operations on the selected files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.14. Compared Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the 'Compared Directory'.  The files in the 'Compared To' directory
will be searched for a match (or difference if selected) for each file in this
directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.15. Compared To Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the 'Compared To' directory.  This directory is searched for a match
(or difference if selected) for each file in 'Compared Directory'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.16. Compare Results ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is a summary of the comparison results.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.5.17. Different ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.6. Query Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Any directory branch in the directory tree may be queried, including the root
directory. To query a directory, select Query from the Directory menu.  The
Query dialog will appear and report the following information at the conclusion
of the count:

      ΓûáNumber of subdirectories in branch.
      ΓûáNumber of files in branch.
      ΓûáNumber of bytes that are in the branch.
      ΓûáNumber of allocated bytes that the branch occupies.
      ΓûáDate that directory queried was created (not available for root
      directory).
      ΓûáThe attributes of the directory queried.

 You may query other branches without closing the dialog by repeating the
 procedure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.6.1. Subdirs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.6.2. Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.6.3. Bytes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.6.4. Allocated bytes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.7. Directory Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The selected directory's attributes may be altered through check box selection
in the Directory Attributes dialog.  Use the attributes in conjunction with a
directory filter to hide directories.

The four modifiable attributes are:

     Read Only - Directory cannot be modified (written to) by the user.
     Hidden - Directory is not displayed by most programs.
     System - Directory is for use by the operating system.
     Archived - Directory is marked when changed.

 Pressing Set causes the selected attributes to be set for the selected
 directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.7.1. Read Only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.7.2. System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.7.3. Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.7.4. Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.7.5. Selected Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.8. Directory Sychronization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In concert with the directory comparison function, a directory synchronization
function is provided that makes it easy the set up repetitive comparison of any
two directories.  The function is started with a press of the 'Briefcase'
pushbutton on the toolbar.  A dialog window then overlays the Data Panel at the
bottom of the main window and an automatic setup is commenced, restoring the
last saved directories and window filters into the appropriate windows.  If
those are the desired directories for the comparison, pressing 'Start'
commences a normal default directory comparison as described above.

The user may change the directories and/or filters before starting a
comparison.  Any setup may be saved for automatic restoration on the next use
of the function by simply pushing the 'Save' button provided.  The first time
use of the mode causes both directories to be set to 'C:\" with no filtering.

This mode currently does not have the capability to restore multi-directory
views. However, the user is free to do so manually before pressing 'Start'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.8.1. Start ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Push to start a directory comparison of the directories shown in the left and
right entry fields.  The directory in the left entry field will be compared
with the directory in the right.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.8.2. Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Push to save the setup (directories and filters) for initialization on next
use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.8.3. Filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Push this button to set a file filter for the active window.  The filter may be
saved for next time use by pushing Save.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.8.4. Swap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Push this button to swap the windows so that the directory to be compared is in
the left window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.8.5. Left entry field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the 'Compare Directory'.  The files in the 'Compare To' directory will
be searched for a match (or difference if selected) for each file in this
directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6.8.6. Right entry field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the 'Compare To' directory.  This directory is searched for a match (or
difference if selected) for each file in 'Compare Directory'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. File Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are two identical File windows in the FileStar/2 display.  The window
title bar shows the current directory and filter.  Each window has five
pushbutton controls at the bottom and three context pop up menus.  The F7 and
F8 keys may be used to activate the windows for input and to seek the cursored
file.

The five pushbuttons are used as follows;

     Ring  - Toggles the window style to next/last style

     Text  - Toggles the text views

     Last Filter  - Toggles the file filter between current and last.
      Displayed on the pushbutton is the total number of files and bytes for
      the directory displayed in the window.

     Icon  - Toggles the icon views

     Parent Directory  - Switches to parent directory

 The Window Options context pop up menu is accessed by a RMB click over the
 Last Filter pushbutton. This menu has options to configure the display.

 A RMB click anywhere within the file list will pop up the Files context menu.
 This menu contains items to manipulate files.

 A RMB click in the title bar will pop up the Title Bar context menu.  This
 menu contains items to access the Windows, Prompts, Setup and Help Action Bar
 menu items and is provided mainly for use when the Action Bar menu has been
 hidden.

 A File window can be moved but may be resized with the mouse. Double clicking
 with the left mouse button in the title bar will expand the window to the
 horizontal size of the FileStar/2 display.  Another double click will restore
 the window to normal size. The windows may be expanded or restored only; they
 will not minimize. They do not expand vertically, leaving the Toolbar and Data
 Panel viewable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1. Files Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Files Action Bar and context popup menus are identical. They contains the
following menu options (use hypertext link for more help):

     Copy - Copy selected file(s)
     Move - Move selected file(s)
     Delete - Delete selected file(s)
     Zip - Zip selected file(s)
     Unzip - Unzip selected file(s)
     Attributes - Change attributes of selected file(s)
     Date/Time - Change date/time of selected file(s)
     Undelete - Undelete selected file(s)
     Edit - Edit selected file(s)
     Browse - Browse selected file(s)
     Select All with *.ext - Select files with same extension
     Select/deselect All - Select/deselect all files
     Reselect/Invert - Reselect/invert previous/current list
     ZipView - Opens ZipView window of selected zip file
     Execute - Activates the Execute dialog
     Rename - Rename selected file(s)
     Print - Print selected file(s)
     File List - Save/print list of selected files
     Compare - Compare two files
     WPS Object - Open object with default WPS action


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2. File Window Controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are five pushbuttons at the bottom of the File windows. These pushbuttons
are used as follows;

     Ring - Toggles the window style to next/last style
     Text - Toggles the text views
     Last Filter - Toggles between last and current filter
     Icon - Toggles the icon views
     Parent Directory - Switches to parent directory


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2.1. Ring Pushbutton ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton toggles the window style ring.  A LMB click changes to the next
window style in a 'ring' of 4 styles.  A RMB click reverses the direction of
the ring and switches to the previous style.

Accelerator Keys - F11/F12

NOTE:

There is a command available in the toolbar to toggle between the last and
current styles.  It is not in the default toolbar and must be added.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2.2. Text Pushbutton ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton alternates the window view between Text and Details views.

Accelerator Keys - Alt T


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2.3. Last Filter Pushbutton ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton serves a dual purpose.  Statically it displays the total number
of files and bytes in the window.  It is also a functional pushbutton that
toggles the window file filter between the current and last set filters.

Accelerator Keys - Ctrl Alt L


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2.4. Icon Pushbutton ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton alternates the window view between Icon and Name Flowed views.

Accelerator Keys - Alt I


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2.5. Parent Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton switches the window to display the parent directory of the
current directory.  Used in conjunction with the Last Directory pushbutton, it
is easy to toggle between the current and parent directories.

Accelerator Keys - Alt .


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.3. File Window Views ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are four window views supported;

     Text - Same as the WPS Flowed Text view, columns of file names
     Details - Same as the WPS Details view, columns of file data
     Icon - Same as the WPS Icon view, row arrangement
     Name - Same as the WPS Flowed Name view, column arrangement
  For file management, the Text and Details views are superior because they are
 faster, display more files in the same window area and consume less resources.

 To instantenously display the maximum number of files in a window, Text mode
 is the clear winner and the Data Panel is designed to show the data of the the
 cursored file. This view is recommended is you do not need to compare the
 columnar data of the Details view.

 The Details view is often preferred because it similar to many older file
 managers and presents file data for each file.  However, the number of files
 instantenously viewable is typically less than one-third of the Text view.

 The Icon and Name views consume memory for the icons and loading time is
 definitely degraded although FileStar/2 loads the icons on a background thread
 after the files are scanned. The number viewable in the typical display is
 about the same as Details view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.4. Click and Sort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The sort criteria used to sort the files in either file window may be changed
with either a single mouse click or single keyboard keystroke combination.  The
criteria that may be set with one click is either ascending or descending sort
on filename, file extension, size or date.  An unsorted view may be set from
the Window Options menu.

To resort the active window with one click, use a LMB or RMB click within the
Name, Size and Date windows on the Data Panel.  A LMB click resorts with an
ASCENDING sort and a RMB click resorts with a DESCENDING sort.  A click in the
left half of the Name field is interpreted to be a name sort and the right half
to be a file extension sort.  Clicks anywhere within the Size and Date fields
resorts the files by size or date criteria.

There is a simulated LED below each window (two below the Name window) that
indicate the current sort.  A green LED below the extension end of the Name
field would indicate that the window is sorted on ascending file extensions.
Similarly, a red LED below the Date field would indicate a descending Date
sort.  Of the four LEDs, only one will be red or green, again a red indication
indicates descending sort and a green indication indicates an ascending sort.
Additionally, the window foreground and background colors momentarily change
while sorting to those of the active file window, with reversed colors for a
descending sort.  The message Window 1also announces the type sort just
performed.

A fifth LED (yellow when active) is also used in the Data Panel to indicate the
that the cursored file has a subject description.  It is located under the file
Attributes window. See support of the Subject extended attribute.

To set the active file window sort from the keyboard, use the following easy to
remember and access key combination;

     Name - Ctrl Shift N

     Ext - Ctrl Shift E

     Size - Ctrl Shift S

     Date - Ctrl Shift D

     Ascending - Ctrl Shift >

     Descending - Ctrl Shift <


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.5. Click and View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Each file window has a pushbutton on the bottom left  (the 'T' button) for
setting or alternating between Text and Details Views. Similarly, a pushbutton
on the bottom right (the 'I' button) is a Name and Icon View set or toggle
pushbutton. These pushbuttons make it very easy to rapidly alter the view of
either window.

The window view may also be easily set from the keyboard.  Use the following
keystrokes to change the view;

 Text - Alt T
                     Sets the last text view used if in an icon view or toggles
                     the text view between Text and Details views.

 Icon - Alt I
                     Sets the last used icon view if in a text view or toggles
                     the icon view between Name and Icon views.

 The icon views support the use of mini-icons.  To toggle the icon views
 between normal and mini-icons, use Ctrl Shift I.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6. File Filters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A File Filter dialog may be activated by selection from the Window Options
context menu, The Setup pulldown menu, the Alt+L key combination, or from the
Toolbar.

This dialog is used to input filename masks, file attribute filter, and to
select a sort option applied to one or both file windows.

Files may be displayed unsorted or sorted by file name, extension, date or
size.

The Mask entry field is used to input a file filter mask. Standard use of
wildcards is supported. An asterisk (*) means 'all or all after'.  For example,
the mask A* would display all files beginning with the letter 'A'. The 'all or
all after' specification terminates at the extension. Therefore the mask *.txt
would filter and display all files with the file extension .txt, and the mask
os2*.ini would display only those filenames with the .ini extension starting
with the three characters 'os2'. The question mark (?) is used to substitute
"Any" for an individual character.  Thus the mask myfile??.txt would display
myfile files with the .txt extension, e.g, myfile01.txt, myfile02.txt,
myfile03.txt; it would not, however, display myfile1.txt since there are not
sufficient characters to occupy the wildcard specified.

Concatenated inclusion filters may be used along with exclusion and date
filters.  Use the ';' to concatenate filters.  File filter masks are limited to
128 characters.

To use an exclusion filter, place a '-' in front of the filter, e.g. '-*.obj'.
To use date filters, use the standard symbols, followed by the date in the
format of date display in the Data Panel;

       '<'  - less than
       '<=' - Less than or equal to
       '='  - Equal to
       '=>' - Equal to or greater than
       '>'  - Greater than

 For example, use *.bak;*.txt;*fstar*;-*.exe;<1-1-96 to includes all files with
 bak and txt extensions, all files with an embedded fstar string within the
 name while excluding any file that matched with an exe extension and include
 only those files dated prior to 1-1-96.

 Twenty (20) entries in the Mask entry field may be saved and are displayed in
 the window below the entry field.  The 'Set' and 'Save' are separate actions
 to prevent filling the saved list with incidental filters.

 Selecting a mask from this list automatically inserts it into the entry field.
 The mask is not applied to the file window(s) until the user presses the Set
 or Set Both pushbutton or double clicks with the LMB on the selection. The
 mask selected is applied to the active window using the Set pushbutton, or
 both windows using the Set Both pushbutton.  The * button restores the "all"
 files filter.

 Checking the R/O (Read Only), System, Hidden and  Archived check boxes will
 include files with those attributes in the displayed file list.  If the check
 box of an attribute is deselected, files with that attribute are not displayed
 (unless the file possesses other selected attributes).

 When using a mouse, the attribute and sort options are selected or deselected
 clicking the LMB on the check box or radio button. To set these options from
 the keyboard, Tab from the Mask entry field to the Include and Sort options.
 Then use the cursor keys to select the desired item. To select or deselect a
 check box, press the spacebar.

 Entries may be deleted from the list using the delete pushbutton.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6.1. Entry field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Mask entry field is used to input a file filter mask. Standard use of
wildcards is supported. An asterisk (*) means 'all or all after'.  For example,
the mask A* would display all files beginning with the letter 'A'. The 'all or
all after' specification terminates at the extension. Therefore the mask *.txt
would filter and display all files with the file extension .txt, and the mask
os2*.ini would display only those filenames with the .ini extension starting
with the three characters 'os2'. The question mark (?) is used to substitute
"Any" for an individual character.  Thus the mask myfile??.txt would display
myfile files with the .txt extension, e.g, myfile01.txt, myfile02.txt,
myfile03.txt; it would not, however, display myfile1.txt since there are not
sufficient characters to occupy the wildcard specified.

Concatenated inclusion filters may be used along with exclusion and date
filters.  Use the semicolon ';' to concatenate filters.  File filter masks are
limited to 128 characters.

To use an exclusion filter, place a minus (-) sign in front of the filter, e.g.
'-*.obj'. To use date filters, prefix the date entry with the desired
comparison operator, followed by the date in the format of date display in the
Data Panel;

       '<'  - less than
       '>'  - greater than
       '<=' - less than or equal to
       '=>' - equal to or greater than
       '='  - equal to


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6.2. R/O ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When checked, files with the 'Read Only' attribute are included in the file
search.  When unchecked, they may or may not be included since the a file may
have multiple attributes, one of which may be set for inclusion. To guarantee
exclusion, the Must Have check box must be checked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6.3. Hidden ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When checked, files with the 'Hidden' attribute are included in the file
search.  When unchecked, they may or may not be included since the a file may
have multiple attributes, one of which may be set for inclusion. To guarantee
exclusion, the Must Have check box must be checked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6.4. System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When checked, files with the 'System' attribute are included in the file
search.  When unchecked, they may or may not be included since the a file may
have multiple attributes, one of which may be set for inclusion. To guarantee
exclusion, the Must Have check box must be checked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6.5. Archived ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When checked, files with the 'Archived' attribute are included in the file
search.  When unchecked, they may or may not be included since the a file may
have multiple attributes, one of which may be set for inclusion. To guarantee
exclusion, the Must Have check box must be checked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6.6. All Files '*' Pushbutton ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton set the 'all files' filter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6.7. Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set pushbutton 'sets' the filter that is in the Mask entry field. The 'set'
action causes a rescan of the directory in the active window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6.8. Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton 'saves' the filter string that is in the Mask entry field.  a
maximum of twenty (20) entries may be saved.  The 'Set' and 'Save' are separate
actions to prevent filling the saved list with incidental filters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6.9. Set Both ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set Both pushbutton 'sets' the filter that is in the Mask entry field. The
'set both' action causes a rescan of the directories in the both windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6.10. Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Entries may be deleted from the list using the this pushbutton.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.7. File Associations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

User defined file associations that are linked to executable programs may be
set in the setup notebook.  In the notebook, select the Paths page. There are
three path pages. The first one is used to set the paths to the editor, viewer,
zip, unzip and file compare executable programs that the use of these functions
require.  By default, the editor is set to the Enhanced PM editor (EPM.EXE),
the viewer is set to faster but more limited PM editor (E.EXE),  and the file
compare utility is set to COMP.COM.  These programs are installed as part of
the base OS/2 installation.  The InfoZIP zip and unzip executables are provided
with the program.  Optionally, there are entries to set the paths to an
external directory compare program and an external print utility program that a
user may prefer to use although there is significant builtin capability for
these functions.

The two additional pages of  the Paths section are labeled User Defined
Associations.  There are nine push buttons on each page used to establish an
executable program link to files with the defined extensions.  The dialog
process to set these links is simple yet effective. Use the dialog to link an
executable program to files of certain extensions.  Once this link is defined,
double clicking on a file with a defined extension will cause the linked
executable program to run with the clicked on file passed as its argument.  Run
time switches may also be defined.  By defining a different program than that
associated with a file extension in the WPS associations, it is possible to
easily run two different programs for files with the same extension.  A double
click will start the FileStar/2 program and an Alt double click will start the
associated WPS program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.8. Seek Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In normal use, pressing a keyboard character key will cause the window to seek
and cursor the first/next filename in the file list with that first character.
In large directories with many files, it is often desirable to expand this seek
file capability to additional characters.  Each window has special Seek File
moding to accomplish this.  Press Shift '|' to activate the moding.  An entry
window will appear in place of the Last Filter pushbutton.

Commence typing the filename desired.  As additional characters are entered,
the first file match is cursored.  With two or three characters, it is
generally  possible to seek and find the file you are looking for.  Any action
you take other than entering more characters will cause the mode to exit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.8.1. Seek File Entry Field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter characters from the keyboard.  As each character is entered, the window
will scroll to the first file in the window that has a first character(s)
match. Any other action besides entering characters will exit the mode and
destroy the entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9. File Operations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File operations are selected from either the Files menu, the Toolbar, or
keyboard combination keys.  Most operations may be performed on multiple files,
whereas others, specifically Execute and ZipView, may be performed only on a
single file.  The file(s) for an operation must be selected before activating a
menu. Most selections activate a dialog for the operation.

     Copy - Copy selected file(s)
     Move - Move selected file(s)
     Delete - Delete selected file(s)
     Zip - Zip selected file(s)
     Unzip - Unzip selected file(s)
     Attributes - Change attributes of selected file(s)
     Date/Time - Change date/time of selected file(s)
     Undelete - Undelete selected file(s)
     Edit - Edit selected file(s)
     Browse - Browse selected file(s)
     ZipView - Opens ZipView window of selected zip file
     Execute - Activates the Execute dialog
     Rename - Rename selected file(s)
     Print - Print selected file(s)
     File List - Save/print list of selected files
     Compare - Compare two files
     WPS Object - Open object with default WPS action


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.1. Common Procedures ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Copy, move, delete, zip and unzip operations utilize dialogs to start the
action. The dialogs are moveable and may be resized, in width only, to enhance
viewing long paths and filenames.  The dialogs contain data fields showing the
file(s) to be operated upon and a target directory, if applicable.

When the operation dialog appears, the source File window is locked from
further normal user input until the selected operation is complete or
cancelled. However, you may modify the selected file list by holding down the
Ctrl key and using the LMB to deselect files from the list or select other
files to be added to the list.

Initiating the Operation

When the desired path is displayed in the target field, click on the desired
action button (Copy, Move, etc.) to start the operation. The selection emphasis
is removed from the files as they are processed and the file is removed from
the window if the operation is a move or delete.  If the Update data during
File Ops option in the Settings notebook is enabled, the file data in the Data
Panel is updated as each file is processed.  The window(s) are automatically
refreshed at the end of the operation. If a problem is encountered during the
process, an appropriate error dialog is presented for user guidance.

Simultaneous Operations

If one file window is in use for an operation (for instance, a long copy job),
the other file window may be used in a normal manner for other operations.

Aborting a Operation

A pushbutton labeled Push to Pause/ESC  will replace the Last Filter pushbutton
at the bottom of the file window during an operation if more than one file is
selected:

Click this button with the LMB, or press Esc on the keyboard, to pause the
operation. The user then has the option to abort the operation, or continue
using a split version of the same button. Because most operations are very
fast, there is often not enough time to pause operations involving a limited
number of files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.1.1. Setting the Target Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For Copy, Move, Zip and Unzip operations, the target path may be changed by
typing the desired target path in the target field.  Error checking is
performed on edited paths and filenames to ensure that they conform to the
drive type (FAT or HPFS) requirements and the dialog title bar will show path
errors and other information.  You may create a target directory by adding it
to the path if there is more than one file selected.  However, unless you need
to create a new directory, it is generally easier to click the path into the
target field by using point and click methods.

Using the Opposite Window to Point and Click

By default, the target path is initialized to the path of the opposite file
window. Click in the window (or use the window select buttons at the bottom of
the Directory window) to set it active so that its directory tree may be used.
If the target directory is on a different drive, scan the appropriate drive
into the window. When the correct tree is displayed, single click on the
desired target directory. The path will appear in the target field of the
dialog. The directory tree will not accept double clicks if its associated file
window is locked.

Using the Same Window to Point and Click

If the target directory is on the same drive as the source, simply click on the
target directory in the tree.

If the target directory is on a different drive, it is best to use Multiple
Trees and, by holding down the CTRL key, add the drive that is needed.
However, it is possible to change drives in single tree moding even though
there are selected files in the File window.  When a dialog is present, the
Drive and Directory windows are decoupled from the File window.  Change drives
and when the tree with the target directory is displayed, single click on the
desired target directory and its path will appear in the target field of the
dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.1.2. Copy or Move Errors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Copy or Move file I/O error will cause the following dialog to be displayed:

The dialog is system modal which means it preempts all mouse and keyboard
inputs. The source file is shown in the title bar.  The cause of the error is
shown in the error field.

The center section of the dialog is used when a duplicate file name exists in
the target directory.  It shows the file data of the source and duplicate
target files.  There will be a filename field and, if a file longname EA is
being created for the target file, a longname field. If there is a longname
field, only it can be edited to rename the file and the filename field will
show a unique incremented filename that will be used to copy or move the file.
This only occurs on drives formatted for the FAT file system. The unique
longname EA will allow copying this file back to a HPFS drive with the original
case and name.

There are six pushbuttons which you use to direct how to recover from the
error. They are:

This option is available only if Confirm Copy Overwrite is checked in the
Settings Notebook, Page 2_1 (Options Tab). If the error was because a duplicate
filename exists in the target directory, pushing Overwrite All will cause the
program to not only overwrite the file shown but all other cases of duplicate
filenames in the target directory for the current operation.

This option is available only if Confirm Copy Overwrite is checked in the
Settings Notebook, Page 2_1 (Options Tab). If the error was because a duplicate
filename exists in the target directory, pushing OverWrite will cause the
program to overwrite only the file shown.

This pushbutton is enabled if there is a file in the target directory (FAT file
system) with the same name and a longname EA is being created to rename the
file. In the latter case, the filename cannot be edited, only the longname.
Pushing the Rename All button will cause the program to rename all files in the
current operation that require renaming with unique longnames automatically.
The renaming convention is similar to the WPS method for compatibility.

If there is a file in the target directory with the same filename, this
pushbutton is enabled after the user has edited the filename (HPFS file system)
or, in the case of FAT drives, a longname EA is being created to rename the
file. In the latter case, the filename cannot be edited, only the longname. A
suggested longname is entered in the longname field. Pushing the Rename button
will cause the program to rename the file as shown in the filename or longname
entry field.

Pushing Skip will cause the program to skip copying the file shown in the title
bar. This is also useful for filling floppy disks after receiving a disk full
error.

 Terminates the operation.

 Displays this help panel.

 This pushbutton is enabled whenever a duplicate filename exists in the target
directory and that file has attributes that will prevent a successful
overwrite. If you wish to overwrite the file, pushing the Clear Attr button
will clear those attributes so overwriting is possible. Otherwise, Skip this
file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.1.2.1. Rename field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to rename a file when the error is caused by a duplicate
filename in the target directory.  It either shows the filename (HPFS) of the
existing file for the user to edit or shows a suggested longname EA (FAT) for
the file which may either be accepted by pushing either Rename or Rename All or
may be edited to a different acceptable name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.1.2.2. Truncated name field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field appears when a duplicate filename exists in the target directory and
the filename will be incremented to a unique name.  The filename cannot be
edited.  The suggested longname in the longname field can be edited.

This only occurs on drives formatted for the FAT file system.  A unique
longname EA will be created to allow copying this file back to a HPFS drive
with the original case and name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.1.2.3. Overwrite All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the error was because a duplicate filename exists in the target directory,
pushing this button will cause the program to not only overwrite the file shown
but all other cases of duplicate filenames in the target directory for the
current operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.1.2.4. Overwrite ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the error was because a duplicate filename exists in the target directory,
pushing this button will cause the program to overwrite only the file shown.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.1.2.5. Rename All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pushing this button will cause the program to rename all files in the current
operation that require renaming with unique longnames automatically. The
renaming convention is similar to the WPS method for compatibility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.1.2.6. Rename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pushing the Rename button will cause the program to rename the file as shown in
the filename or longname entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.1.2.7. Skip ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pushing Skip will cause the program to skip copying the file shown. This is
also useful for filling floppy disks after receiving a disk full error.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.1.2.8. Clear Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton is enabled whenever a duplicate filename exists in the target
directory and that file has attributes that will prevent a successful
overwrite. If you wish to overwrite the file, push this button to clear those
attributes so overwriting is possible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.2. Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Subject Extended Attribute

The file subject extended attribute is supported.  The inclusion of the file
subject in a directory scan may be toggled with the Load Subjects menu item
from the Directories Scan Dir cascaded menu.  The Files Window Options menu has
a Show Subjects option.  Toggling this option on automatically adds it to the
details view.

There is a yellow simulated LED located beneath the file 'Attributes' display
field that 'illuminates' when the cursored file has a subject attached.  A left
mouse click in the display field above the LED will display the subject in the
message window.

The subject text may be easily added or modified or deleted. A right mouse
click in the file 'Attributes' display field in the Data Panel will activate
the same entry field that is used to rename files in the Data Panel. An
existing subject may be edited or deleted in this field or a subject may be
added as desired. Adding a subject to a file is therefore as simple as right
mouse clicking in the field to activate the entry field, entering the subject
text and pressing Enter.

Longname Extended Attribute

The longname extended attribute is supported.  When a file is copied or moved
from a HPFS drive to a FAT drive, a longname EA is created for the file on the
FAT drive if;

     The name is not FAT compatible
     The name is mixed case
     The name is a duplicate of an existing filename

 If the name is a duplicate of an existing filename, the Copy/Move Error dialog
 will appear and provide the choice of accepting a proposed longname, editing
 the proposed name or overwriting the file with the existing name.

 When files from a FAT drive are copied to an HPFS drive, the longname is used
 if one exists thereby restoring the original name.

 The longnames on a FAT drive may be viewed in Details view. The inclusion of
 the file longnames in a directory scan may be toggled with the Load Longnames
 menu item from the Directories Scan Dir cascaded menu.  The Files Window
 Options menu has a Show Longnames option.  Toggling this option on
 automatically adds it to the details view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.3. Abort buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pausing or Aborting a Operation

A pushbutton labeled Push Bar/ESC to Pause/ESC  will replace the Last Filter
pushbutton at the bottom of the file window during an operation if more than
one file is selected:

Click this button with the LMB, or press Esc on the keyboard, to pause the
operation. The user then has the option to abort the operation, or continue
using a split version of the same button. Because most operations are very
fast, there is often not enough time to pause operations involving a limited
number of files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.3.1. Abort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Push to abort the current operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.3.2. Continue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Push to continue the current operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.3.3. Push Bar/ESC to Pause ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Push to pause the current operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.4. Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Copy and Move Operations

Drag and drop is supported for these file operations.

The common procedure for using the dialogs to Copy or Move files is as follows:

   1. Select file(s) - Select one or more files from a file window for the
      operation.
   2. Select operation - Use popup or pulldown action menus, or accelerator
      keys.
   3. Select target path - If target drive is already used in one of the file
      windows, single click in that file window to display its directory tree.
      Otherwise, read the desired drive into either file window. Single click
      on the desired target directory.
   4. Initiate operation. - Press action pushbutton in dialog window.

 Dialogs

 The selected operation dialog appears positioned at it's last used position.
 The dialog is moveable and may be resized, in width only, to enhance viewing
 long paths and filenames. The dialog contains three data fields.

      Γûá The upper field contains the full file path and file name of the first
      selected file and is read only.

      Γûá The middle field summarizes the additional files included in the
      operation and is also read only.

      Γûá The lower field, labeled To, contains the target path for the
      operation. It is initialized to the path of the other file window. The
      target path may be changed by mouse, keyboard or manual input.

 The Copy and Move dialogs have a check box which may be used to toggle the
 Verify Write option for the current operation.  It may be set to default to
 either state in the Settings notebook Options.

 When the operation dialog appears, the source File window is locked from
 further normal user input until the selected operation is complete or
 cancelled. However, you may modify the selected file list by holding down the
 Ctrl key and using the LMB to deselect files from the list or select other
 files to be added to the list. This is a common feature of the Copy, Move,
 Delete, Zip and Unzip dialogs.

 The target path may be changed by typing the desired target path in the target
 field.  Error checking is performed on edited paths and filenames to ensure
 that they conform to the drive type (FAT or HPFS) requirements and the dialog
 title bar will show path errors and other information. You may create a target
 directory by adding it to the path if there is more than one file selected.
 However, unless you need to create a new directory, it is generally easier to
 click the path into the target field by using point and click methods.

 If you are copying or moving a single file and change the filename, that file
 is cloned to the new name.  You may clone a file to the same directory as the
 source.

 If an I/O error occurs, the Copy or Move Error dialog will appear. This dialog
 will indicate the cause of the error as well as provide the options to
 overwrite existing target files of the same name, rename files that have the
 same name as existing target files, remove any file attributes that may be the
 cause of the error or skip the file with the error.

 Initiating the Operation

 When the desired path is displayed in the target field, click on the desired
 action button (Copy, Move, etc.) to start the operation. The selection
 emphasis is removed from the files as they are copied and the file is removed
 from the window if the operation is a move or delete.  If the Update data
 during File Ops option in the Settings notebook is enabled, the file data in
 the Data Panel is updated as each file is processed.  The window(s) are
 automatically refreshed at the end of the operation. If a problem is
 encountered during the process, a error dialog is presented for user guidance.

 Pausing or Aborting a Operation

 A pushbutton labeled Push Bar/ESC to Pause  will replace the Last Filter
 pushbutton at the bottom of the file window during an operation if more than
 one file is selected:

 Click this button with the LMB, or press Esc on the keyboard, to pause the
 operation. The user then has the option to abort the operation, or continue
 using a split version of the same button. Because most operations are very
 fast, there is often not enough time to pause operations involving a limited
 number of files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.4.1. Source field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the first Source file, with complete path, included in the
file operation. It is a read only field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.4.2. Others field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the additional number of files, and their cumulative size,
that are included in the copy operation. It is a read only field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.4.3. Target field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See Setting the Target Path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.4.4. Copy Verify ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box to verify copy writes to disk media. When the verify mode is
active, the operating system verifies that data written to the disk is recorded
correctly, even though disk recording errors are rare.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.5. Move ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Copy and Move Operations

Drag and drop is supported for these file operations.

The common procedure for using the dialogs to Copy or Move files is as follows:

   1. Select file(s) - Select one or more files from a file window for the
      operation.
   2. Select operation - Use popup or pulldown action menus, or accelerator
      keys.
   3. Select target path - If target drive is already used in one of the file
      windows, single click in that file window to display its directory tree.
      Otherwise, read the desired drive into either file window. Single click
      on the desired target directory.
   4. Initiate operation. - Press action pushbutton in dialog window.

 Dialogs

 The selected operation dialog appears positioned at it's last used position.
 The dialog is moveable and may be resized, in width only, to enhance viewing
 long paths and filenames. The dialog contains three data fields.

      Γûá The upper field contains the full file path and file name of the first
      selected file and is read only.

      Γûá The middle field summarizes the additional files included in the
      operation and is also read only.

      Γûá The lower field, labeled To, contains the target path for the
      operation. It is initialized to the path of the other file window. The
      target path may be changed by mouse, keyboard or manual input.

 The Copy and Move dialogs have a check box which may be used to toggle the
 Verify Write option for the current operation.  It may be set to default to
 either state in the Settings notebook Options.

 When the operation dialog appears, the source File window is locked from
 further normal user input until the selected operation is complete or
 cancelled. However, you may modify the selected file list by holding down the
 Ctrl key and using the LMB to deselect files from the list or select other
 files to be added to the list. This is a common feature of the Copy, Move,
 Delete, Zip and Unzip dialogs.

 The target path may be changed by typing the desired target path in the target
 field.  Error checking is performed on edited paths and filenames to ensure
 that they conform to the drive type (FAT or HPFS) requirements and the dialog
 title bar will show path errors and other information.  You may create a
 target directory by adding it to the path if there is more than one file
 selected.  However, unless you need to create a new directory, it is generally
 easier to click the path into the target field by using point and click
 methods.

 If you are copying or moving a single file and change the filename, that file
 is cloned to the new name.  You may clone a file to the same directory as the
 source.

 If an I/O error occurs, the Copy or Move Error dialog will appear. This dialog
 will indicate the cause of the error as well as provide the options to
 overwrite existing target files of the same name, rename files that have the
 same name as existing target files, remove any file attributes that may be the
 cause of the error or skip the file with the error.

 Initiating the Operation

 When the desired path is displayed in the target field, click on the desired
 action button (Copy, Move, etc.) to start the operation. The selection
 emphasis is removed from the files as they are processed and the file is
 removed from the window if the operation is a move or delete.  If the Update
 data during File Ops option in the Settings notebook is enabled, the file data
 in the Data Panel is updated as each file is processed.  The window(s) are
 automatically refreshed at the end of the operation. If a problem is
 encountered during the process, an appropriate error dialog is presented for
 user guidance.

 Pausing or Aborting a Operation

 A pushbutton labeled Push Bar/ESC to Pause/ESC  will replace the Last Filter
 pushbutton at the bottom of the file window during an operation if more than
 one file is selected:

 Click this button with the LMB, or press Esc on the keyboard, to pause the
 operation. The user then has the option to abort the operation, or continue
 using a split version of the same button. Because most operations are very
 fast, there is often not enough time to pause operations involving a limited
 number of files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.5.1. Source field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the first Source file, with complete path, included in the
file operation. It is a read only field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.5.2. Others field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field shows the additional number of files, and their cumulative size,
that are included in the copy operation. It is a read only field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.5.3. Target field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See Setting the Target Path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.6. Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Files may be deleted with or without the intervening File Delete dialog. This
dialog is intended to serve as a confirmation that the user really wants to
delete the selected files and gives the user the opportunity to back out of the
operation. The Confirm File Delete option in the Settings Notebook, Page 2_1,
turns this confirmation on or off.

The recommended method to initiate file deletions is to select Delete from the
file window context menu (RMB click in window).  The menu gives the user a
visual reminder as to whether the File Delete dialog will be used by indicating
Delete.... Otherwise, the Delete menu option is line bordered and selecting
delete in this case immediately deletes the selected files.  Using the window
popup menu also insures that the user is well aware of which file window is
active and for which the delete command applies.

A delete operation may also be initiated by selection from the Action Bar
pulldown menu, the Toolbar, or pressing Ctrl+Del from the keyboard.

The File Delete dialog appears positioned at it's last used position. The
dialog is moveable and may be resized in length to enhance viewing long paths
and filenames. It contains two data fields:

      Γûá The upper field contains the full file path and file name of the first
      file in the selected list.

      Γûá The lower field summarizes the additional files included in the delete
      operation.

 A check box for control of the type of file delete (recoverable or permanently
 deleted) is provided. If the box is checked, the file(s) are permanently
 deleted. Otherwise, they are deleted to the DELETE directory on the drive if
 the environment variable SET DELDIR is enabled and set for the drive in the
 config.sys file.

 A visual reminder that all selected files will be deleted is also presented in
 the dialog.

 When the operation dialog is present, the source File Window is locked from
 further normal user input until the selected operation is complete or
 cancelled.  However, you can modify the selected file list by holding down the
 Ctrl key and using the left mouse button to deselect files from the list or
 select other files to be added to the list. This is a common feature of the
 Copy, Move, Delete, Zip and Unzip dialogs.

  Pressing the Delete pushbutton in the dialog will initiate the delete
 operation. The deleted files are removed from the window as they are deleted
 and the window is refreshed at the end of the operation automatically. If a
 problem is encountered during the process, a Delete Error dialog is popped up
 for user information and direction.

 Aborting the Operation

  If more than one file is selected for the operation, a green pushbutton,
 labeled Press/Esc to Pause, will replace the File Filter pushbutton at the
 bottom of the file window once the operation starts.  Clicking this pushbutton
 with the mouse, or pressing Esc on the keyboard, will pause the operation.
 The user then has the option to Abort or Continue using a split version of the
 same pushbutton. Because most operations are very fast, there is hardly time
 to pause operations involving only a few files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.6.1. Force delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If this box is checked, the file(s) are permanently deleted. Otherwise, they
are deleted to the DELETE directory on the drive if the environment variable
SET DELDIR is enabled and set for the drive in the config.sys file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.6.2. Delete Error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See Delete Error Help.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.6.2.1. Delete Error Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A file delete error will cause the following dialog to be displayed:

The dialog is system modal which means it preempts all mouse and keyboard
inputs.

The only error recovery supported is for the case where the file has the Read
Only attribute set. Otherwise you must skip the file or cancel the operation.

 If the error is because the file has the ReadOnly attribute set, pushing Del
R/O will remove this attribute and delete the file if it's not a shared file.

 Pushing Skip will cause the program to skip deleting the file shown. The
delete operation is resumed with the next file.

Pushing Cancel will terminate the delete operation.

 Displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.7. Zip ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Zip and Unzip Operations

The common procedure for using the dialogs to zip and unzip files is as
follows:

   1. Select file(s) - Select one or more files from a file window for the
      operation.  For an unzip operation, the file extension(s) are typically
      '.ZIP' but do not necessarily have to be.
   2. Select operation - Use popup or action menus, or accelerator keys.
   3. Select target path - If drive is already selected in one of the file
      windows, click in that file window.  Otherwise, read the desired drive
      into the opposite file window. Click on desired directory in the
      directory tree.
   4. Initiate operation. - Press action pushbutton in dialog window. Hold down
      the Ctrl key to keep the Zip window from auto-closing if desired.

 Dialogs

 The selected operation dialog appears in it's last used position and size. The
 dialog is moveable and may be resized in length to enhance viewing long paths
 and filenames. The dialog contains four data fields.

      Γûá The first field contains the full file path and file name of the first
      selected file and is read only.

      Γûá The second field summarizes the additional files included in the
      operation and is read only.

      Γûá The third field, labeled To, contains the target path for the zip or
      unzip operation. It is initialized to the path set on the appropriate
      page of the Settings notebook. This target path may be changed by mouse,
      keyboard or manual input. For zip operations, a "noname00" filename is
      added to the target path. The filename may be edited as desired. Error
      checking is performed on edited paths and filenames to ensure that they
      conform to the drive type (FAT or HPFS) requirements.

      Γûá The fourth field shows the zip or unzip switches to be used for the
      operation (defaulted to the options set in the Settings notebook).  It
      also contains an Options pushbutton which, when pressed, will popup the
      switch options dialog appropriate for the operation.  Alternatively, the
      user may manually edit the switch field.

 When the operation dialog appears, the source File Window is locked from
 further normal user input until the selected operation is complete or
 cancelled.  However, you can modify the selected file list by holding down the
 Ctrl key and using the left mouse button to deselect files from the list or
 select other files to be added to the list. This is a common feature of the
 Copy, Move, Delete, Zip and Unzip dialogs.

 The initialized target directory for zip and unzip operations is set on the
 appropriate page of the Settings notebook. The target path may be easily
 changed using the point and click method or manually entered.

 Zipping a Directory

 To archive the contents of a directory (including subdirectories), select the
 directory in the tree and select Zip from the Directory menu.  The Zip
 Directory dialog will appear.  You may change the selected directory after the
 dialog appears.

 The target directory is shown in the To field.  Use point and click selection
 of the target path using a directory tree or type in the target directory
 path. Then edit the target file name for the file that will be created. Press
 Zip to start the zip operation.

 You may modify the zip options by pressing Options on the dialog and selecting
 the desired options or directly editing the options string.

 See Directory Operations for further discussion on using the dialogs to
 perform directory operations.

 Initiating the Operation

 When the desired path is displayed in the target field, click on the operation
 pushbutton (Zip or Unzip) to start the operation.  The Ctrl key may be held
 down when the operation pushbutton is pushed to keep the Zip/Unzip windows
 from auto-closing.  If there are errors, this is required to read the error
 message.  The selection emphasis is removed from the files as they are sent to
 the executable programs, ZIP.EXE and UNZIP.EXE. The window(s) are
 automatically refreshed at the end of the operation as appropriate.

 A foreground OS/2 window will pop up running ZIP.EXE or UNZIP.EXE.  The user
 interacts with these windows if required to consent to certain actions.  The
 foreground window will close automatically when the operation is finished.

 Aborting the Operation

 If more than one file is selected for the operation, a green pushbutton,
 labeled Press/Esc to Pause, will replace the Data Summary window at the bottom
 of the file window once the operation starts.  Clicking this pushbutton with
 the mouse, or pressing Esc  on the keyboard, will pause the operation.  The
 user then has the option to Abort or Continue using a split version of the
 same pushbutton.  Because most operations are very fast, there is hardly time
 to pause operations involving only a few files.  Once the foreground OS/2
 window running the ZIP or UNZIP executable appears, the operation on the
 current file cannot be aborted from FileStar. The foreground window executing
 ZIP or UNZIP may be aborted with a Ctrl+C from the keyboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.7.1. Target field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.7.2. Switch field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.7.3. Source field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.7.4. Others field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.8. Unzip ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Zip and Unzip File Operations

The common procedure for using the dialogs to zip and unzip files is as
follows:

   1. Select file(s) - Select one or more files from a file window for the
      operation.  For an unzip operation, the file extension(s) are typically
      '.ZIP' but do not necessarily have to be.
   2. Select operation - Use popup or action menus, or accelerator keys.
   3. Select target path - If drive is already selected in one of the file
      windows, click in that file window.  Otherwise, read the desired drive
      into the opposite file window. Click on desired directory in the
      directory tree.
   4. Initiate operation. - Press action pushbutton in dialog window. Hold down
      the Ctrl key to keep the Zip window from auto-closing if desired.

 Dialogs

 The selected operation dialog appears in it's last used position and size. The
 dialog is moveable and may be resized in length to enhance viewing long paths
 and filenames. The dialog contains four data fields.

      Γûá The first field contains the full file path and file name of the first
      selected file and is read only.

      Γûá The second field summarizes the additional files included in the
      operation and is read only.

      Γûá The third field, labeled To, contains the target path for the zip or
      unzip operation. It is initialized to the path set on the appropriate
      page of the Settings notebook. This target path may be changed by mouse,
      keyboard or manual input. For zip operations, a "noname00" filename is
      added to the target path. The filename may be edited as desired. Error
      checking is performed on edited paths and filenames to ensure that they
      conform to the drive type (FAT or HPFS) requirements.

      Γûá The fourth field shows the zip or unzip switches to be used for the
      operation (defaulted to the options set in the Settings notebook).  It
      also contains an Options pushbutton which, when pressed, will popup the
      switch options dialog appropriate for the operation.  Alternatively, the
      user may manually edit the switch field.

 When the operation dialog appears, the source File Window is locked from
 further normal user input until the selected operation is complete or
 cancelled.  However, you can modify the selected file list by holding down the
 Ctrl key and using the left mouse button to deselect files from the list or
 select other files to be added to the list. This is a common feature of the
 Copy, Move, Delete, Zip and Unzip dialogs.

 The initialized target directory for zip and unzip operations is set on the
 appropriate page of the Settings notebook. The target path may be easily
 changed using the point and click method or manually entered.

 Initiating the Operation

 When the desired path is displayed in the target field, click on the operation
 pushbutton (Zip or Unzip) to start the operation.  The Ctrl key may be held
 down when the operation pushbutton is pushed to keep the Zip/Unzip windows
 from auto-closing.  If there are errors, this is required to read the error
 message.  The selection emphasis is removed from the files as they are sent to
 the executable programs, ZIP.EXE and UNZIP.EXE. The window(s) are
 automatically refreshed at the end of the operation as appropriate.

 A foreground OS/2 window will pop up running ZIP.EXE or UNZIP.EXE.  The user
 interacts with these windows if required to consent to certain actions.  The
 foreground window will close automatically when the operation is finished.

 Aborting the Operation

 If more than one file is selected for the operation, a green pushbutton,
 labeled Press/Esc to Pause, will replace the Data Summary window at the bottom
 of the file window once the operation starts.  Clicking this pushbutton with
 the mouse, or pressing Esc  on the keyboard, will pause the operation.  The
 user then has the option to Abort or Continue using a split version of the
 same pushbutton.  Because most operations are very fast, there is hardly time
 to pause operations involving only a few files.  Once the foreground OS/2
 window running the ZIP or UNZIP executable appears, the operation on the
 current file cannot be aborted from FileStar. The foreground window executing
 ZIP or UNZIP may be aborted with a Ctrl+C from the keyboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.8.1. Target field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.8.2. Switch field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.8.3. Source field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.8.4. Others field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9. File Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The attributes of all selected files are changed in one operation by presetting
the desired attributes and then pushing Set.  The four modifiable attributes
are:

     Read Only - File cannot be modified (written to) by the user.
     Hidden - File is not displayed by most programs and the dir command.
     System - File is for use by the operating system.
     Archived - File is marked when changed.

 For each attribute, select No Change, Set or Clear.  Pressing Set causes the
 selected attributes to be set for each selected file in the active file
 window.

 To set attributes from the keyboard, use the Tab key to select the attribute
 to change, then use the Up/Dn arrow keys to select the setting.  The Tab key
 cycles through the attributes and pushbuttons.

 The attributes of the cursored file are displayed in the Attributes window in
 the Data Panel and indicated by "r", "h", "s" and "a".  The attributes of each
 displayed file may be viewed in the Attributes column of the Details View.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9.1. No Change ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9.2. Clear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9.3. Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9.4. No Change ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9.5. Clear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9.6. Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9.7. No Change ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9.8. Clear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9.9. Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9.10. No Change ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9.11. Clear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9.12. Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.9.13. Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set pushbutton initiates the action of setting the attributes of the
selected files per the settings in the dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.10. Set File Date/Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The last write file date and time of all selected files in the active File
window are changed in one operation by presetting the desired last write date
and time and then pushing Set.  Use the dialog up/dn scroll buttons to "spin"
the desired parameter into the applicable window.  Although the Sec. control
sets to the nearest second, the actual set time is set to the nearest two
seconds.

To set file date and time from the keyboard, use the Tab key to select the
window to modify (Mo., Day, Year etc.), then use the Up/Dn arrow keys to modify
the parameter.  The Tab key cycles through the windows and pushbuttons.

The file date and time are displayed in the file Date and Time window in the
Data Panel.  These displayed values are the last write date and time.

Most users have no need to modify the file date and time.  In most cases it is
desirable to leave the file date and time as set by the system.

The changing of date and time of directory entries is not currently supported.
The last write date and time for directories (equates to create date and time)
can be viewed by selecting Query for the selected directory from the popup or
action bar menus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.10.1. Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set pushbutton initiates the action of setting the last write date and time
of the selected files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.11. Undelete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For those users that desire a quick and simple undelete of recently deleted
files, an undelete capability is provided that interfaces with the OS/2 DELETE
directory. Therefore for this feature to work, the user must remove the REM
before the SET DELDIR= statement in the CONFIG.SYS file, thereby enabling this
standard OS/2 feature which is disabled on installation by default.  Contrary
to popular opinion, enabling this feature does not noticeably degrade
performance, at least in the way that this program deletes files.

To enable this feature, you must edit your CONFIG.SYS file and remove the REM
in front of the SET DELDIR= statement. You should also edit the drive list,
leaving in just those drives that you want enabled and also set the maximum
size of the directory to whatever is appropriate for your system (how much
drive space you are willing to give up).  By default, the number is 512 which
is 512k. Set this size to 1024, 2048 or 4096 (1,2 or 4 MBytes) if you can
afford to do so. Although you can change the delete directory name in the
CONFIG.SYS file, do not do this.  The program expects the directory to be named
DELETE. It is highly recommended that you enable this capability and use this
Undelete function when needed.

In OS/2, files may be deleted to a unreadable file name in the DELETE directory
or permanently deleted (forced deleted).  FileStar/2 has no capability to
undelete permanently deleted files.  The Options setup allows for the default
file delete to be of either type.  The option is titled 'Default is forced file
delete' and is located on the first Options page in the setup notebook.  The
file delete dialog, which is optionally used, has a check box option to change
this state for any one delete instance.  If you are going to use the DELETE
directory, with the builtin undelete capability to easily view and undelete
files from this directory, you must make sure that the 'Delete is forced file
delete' option is not enabled (unchecked).

Providing that a drive has the delete directory enabled, all files that are not
forced (permanently) deleted may be found, viewed and undeleted.  Selecting
Undelete on the Files menu or pressing the Undelete toolbar button will cause a
switch the DELETE directory and show the contents. One difference is readily
apparent;  deleted files that are still recoverable have a path for that drive
shown. The user may view (browse) a selected ASCII file in a normal browse
manner (double click on the filename) prior to undeleting it.  Use the window
popup menu to then either permanently delete or undelete the selected file(s).
Undeleted files are restored in their original directory.

When the DELETE directory fills to capacity, files are permanently deleted in a
FIFO (First In First Out) manner.  If a single deleted file is larger than the
maximum size set for the DELETE directory, that file is saved and recoverable
but will be lost when the next file is deleted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.12. Rename file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The file to be renamed must be selected (highlighted) in the active file
window. Selecting Rename from the window menu (or pushing the key combination
Alt+N) will  present a long file name entry field in the Data Panel with the
cursored file name ready for editing.  The pushbutton legend will change to
"Rename".

If changes are made in the file name, the Rename pushbutton label changes color
which is then pushed to rename the file. If no changes are made to the
filename, pushing the Rename pushbutton or Esc cancels the operation.

If file rename is selected with multiple files selected, the Name pushbutton
will be titled Rename Files vice Rename for a single file.  Wildcards may then
be used to rename all selected files using the pattern entered.  If a rename
conflict exists, the function will error out without renaming any files beyond
that point.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.13. ZipView ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The ZipView Window is used to view and manipulate the files of a ZIP archive
file. The archive file may be selected and read into the window with a LMB
double click, the menus or the Alt+V key combination.

The window is sizeable and moveable. Size and position data are saved on
closing the window. It has most of the window characteristics of the file
windows, including popup function and options menus with the same hot zones for
activation. It inherits the file window background color and detail view titles
configuration. Only the text and detail views are available. The files may be
sorted by the same options except the date sort is not available.

The program must have access to Info-ZIP's UNZIP.EXE to read the file into the
window and access to ZIP.EXE to perform some of the window functions. The path
to these files must exist in the External Programs Zip entry field, Page 3_1,
Settings Notebook. The program automatically fills this field if the files are
found in the environment path.

If the temporary directory \WORKDIR does not exist as a subdirectory to the
directory in which FILESTAR.EXE is installed, it is created along with the
ZipView Window. While no harm is done if you later delete this directory, you
just as well leave it alone so it does not have to be recreated. The program
deletes all files and subdirectories in \WORKDIR either when the window is
closed or the program is terminated.

When viewing multiple files with the ZipView window, you do not need to close
it between files. When another ZIP file is selected, the window is emptied
before reading the new file. You may also LMB double click on a zip file within
the zip file in the window and that file will be read into the window.

The image above does not show all the detail view fields. These are:

      Γûá Filename - File name within the zip file.
      Γûá Size - The normal, uncompressed file size in bytes.
      Γûá Date - The last write file date.
      Γûá Time - The last write file time.
      Γûá Ratio - Percentage compression.
      Γûá ArcSize - Compressed file size.
      Γûá Method - Method of compression.

 Window Functions

 The window functions activated from either the window pushbuttons or popup
 menu are:

  - Pushing the WorkDir pushbutton dumps the entire zip file into the work
 directory \WORKDIR. The ZipView Window is closed and the work directory is
 read into the other file window, ready for you to use any file window
 function. These files will be deleted either upon using the ZipView Window
 again or at program termination, so treat them as temporary. There is an
 exception; You may LMB double click an a zip file in the work directory,
 display it in a ZipView Window and then dump this file into the work directory
 without the previous files in the work directory being deleted. In other
 words, the files in the work directory are not deleted if the zip file in the
 window came from the work directory.

  Launches the browse or image viewer program on the cursored file. A LMB
 double click accomplishes the same thing. Views all file extensions supported
 in a file window.

  Initiates a dialog process to add files to the archive file in the window.
 This pushbutton is labeled Create if the ZipView Window is launched without a
 cursored zip file in the active file window. Pushing Create will start a
 dialog process to create a zip file and add selected files to it.

  Initiates a dialog process to extract selected files from the archive file in
 the window to the directory of choice.

  Starts the editor program on the cursored file. The file is extracted to the
 work directory where it is edited. When the editor is closed the file is
 re-zipped back into the archive file in the window. Edits ASCII and ICO, BMP
 and PTR files.

  Deletes the selected files in the ZipView Window from the archive file.

  This is it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.13.1. Container ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.13.2. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The ZipView Window is used to view and manipulate the files of a ZIP archive
file. The archive file may be selected and read into the window with a LMB
double click, the menus or the Alt+V key combination.

The window is sizeable and moveable. Size and position data are saved on
closing the window. It has most of the window characteristics of the file
windows, including popup function and options menus with the same hot zones for
activation. It inherits the file window background color and detail view titles
configuration. Only the text and detail views are available. The files may be
sorted by the same options except the date sort is not available.

The program must have access to Info-ZIP's UNZIP.EXE to read the file into the
window and access to ZIP.EXE to perform some of the window functions. The path
to these files must exist in the External Programs Zip entry field, Page 3_1,
Settings Notebook. The program automatically fills this field if the files are
found in the environment path.

If the temporary directory \WORKDIR does not exist as a subdirectory to the
directory in which FILESTAR.EXE is installed, it is created along with the
ZipView Window. While no harm is done if you later delete this directory, you
just as well leave it alone so it does not have to be recreated. The program
deletes all files and subdirectories in \WORKDIR either when the window is
closed or the program is terminated.

When viewing multiple files with the ZipView window, you do not need to close
it between files. When another ZIP file is selected, the window is emptied
before reading the new file. You may also LMB double click on a zip file within
the zip file in the window and that file will be read into the window.

The image above does not show all the detail view fields. These are:

      Γûá Filename - File name within the zip file.
      Γûá Size - The normal, uncompressed file size in bytes.
      Γûá Date - The last write file date.
      Γûá Time - The last write file time.
      Γûá Ratio - Percentage compression.
      Γûá ArcSize - Compressed file size.
      Γûá Method - Method of compression.

 Window Functions

 The window functions activated from either the window pushbuttons or popup
 menu are:

  - Pushing the WorkDir pushbutton dumps the entire zip file into the work
 directory \WORKDIR. The ZipView Window is closed and the work directory is
 read into the other file window, ready for you to use any file window
 function. These files will be deleted either upon using the ZipView Window
 again or at program termination, so treat them as temporary. There is an
 exception; You may LMB double click an a zip file in the work directory,
 display it in a ZipView Window and then dump this file into the work directory
 without the previous files in the work directory being deleted. In other
 words, the files in the work directory are not deleted if the zip file in the
 window came from the work directory.

  Launches the browse or image viewer program on the cursored file. A LMB
 double click accomplishes the same thing. Views all file extensions supported
 in a file window.

  Initiates a dialog process to add files to the archive file in the window.
 This pushbutton is labeled Create if the ZipView Window is launched without a
 cursored zip file in the active file window. Pushing Create will start a
 dialog process to create a zip file and add selected files to it.

  Initiates a dialog process to extract selected files from the archive file in
 the window to the directory of choice.

  Starts the editor program on the cursored file. The file is extracted to the
 work directory where it is edited. When the editor is closed the file is
 re-zipped back into the archive file in the window. Edits ASCII and ICO, BMP
 and PTR files.

  Deletes the selected files in the ZipView Window from the archive file.

  This is it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.13.3. Detail ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.14. Execute Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Execute dialog is displayed when Execute is pushed on the Toolbar, Execute
is selected from either the popup or pulldown menu for a file window or the key
combination Alt+X is pushed. What is displayed in the dialog entry field is
dependent on the file extension of the cursored file in the active file window.
If it's an executable file, you get the cursored file preset in the Run entry
field. If it's not, the entry field is blank and labeled Cmd. In either case,
you may change the entry as needed to run a command or program. You may also
select a different file from the file windows after the dialog is displayed.
When the command is entered, simply press Run to execute the program or
command.

There are three check boxes in the dialog;

Windowed Session - If checked, the program is run in a windowed mode, otherwise
it is run full screen.

Auto Close Session - If checked, the program will auto close at completion.
Otherwise the program will terminate and the user must close the window.

Auto Close Dialog - If checked the Execute dialog auto closes when the Run
button is pushed.

For executable files, the type of program is automatically detected and shown
in the title bar. Some program types will disable the windowed and auto close
options as appropriate.

Up to twenty entries may be saved in a list that the user may drop down and
select from. The Save option saves the current command line. The command is not
saved on a Run command.  This permits running various programs without filling
the used list with unwanted entries.

While the window has a minimum (and usually the optimum) size, it may be
resized to allow viewing more or all of the list and to lengthen the entry
field.

The command line accepts parameters as follows;

     %f - pass the selected filename without a path.
     %F - pass the selected filename with a path.
     %d - pass the selected directory name.
     %D - pass the full selected directory path.
     %V - pass the drive letter with colon.

 You may point and click a drive, directory and multiple files in as parameters
 to an existing command line.  As an example of the latter, if EPM.EXE is
 entered as the run time program, clicking on files in a file window will
 concatenate these files to the command line and cause EPM  to load those
 files.  To concatenate a file, directory or drive onto the command line, hold
 down the Ctrl key while clicking on the desired drive, directory or file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.14.1. Execute field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is basically a command line.  It will take OS/2 commands or run
executables files. The field may be filled by point and click on an executable
file.  OS/2 commands must be entered manually but may be saved.  There are some
commands, such ad CD, that are not supported.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.14.2. Auto Close Session ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, the program will auto close at completion.  Otherwise the program
will terminate and the user must close the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.14.3. Auto Close Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, the program will auto close at completion.  Otherwise the program
will terminate and the user must close the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.14.4. Run ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Runs the command or executable file in the Run or Cmd entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.14.5. Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Up to twenty entries may be saved in a list that the user may drop down and
select from. The Save option saves the current command line. The command is not
saved on a Run command.  This permits running various programs without filling
the used list with unwanted entries.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.14.6. Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Delete pushbutton deletes the selected list item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15. Print Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When print is selected from a menu or the toolbar, a print dialog is opened
that provides for selection of the installed printer to use as well as the
printer font for those printers that are capable. There is also a Setup
pushbutton that activates the Page Setup dialog.  This dialog is used to set
several page options and to access the Job Properties dialog before commencing
a file print.  Up to 50 files may be selected for printing in one print job.
Files are printed to the print spooler.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.1. Print Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Print Options dialog is used to select the installed printer to use, select
a printer font and font size, modify the selected files list if desired and to
activate a Page Setup dialog that may be used to set other page options.

Select Printer:

This is a list of the installed printers. Single click the LMB on a printer to
select it.

Select printer font:

This is a list of the fonts available for the selected printer.  Choose one
with a single LMB click.

Size:

This is a list of the fonts sizes available for the selected printer.  Choose
one with a single LMB click.

Setup

Push this button to activate the Page Setup dialog.  This dialog has setup
options for selection of margins, inclusion of headers and footers including
use of the file name as a header and the date/time stamp in the footer and line
numbers may be added to the output. Acceptable printer forms should be detected
and shown.  The Job Properties dialog may be accessed to set the form and other
parameters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.1.1. Printers list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is a list of the installed printers. Single click the LMB on a printer to
select it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.1.2. Font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is a list of the availables fonts for the selected printer. All public and
private fonts are listed.  Select the desired font, then select the desired
font size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.1.3. Font size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is a list of the fonts available for the selected printer.  Choose one
with a single LMB click.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.1.4. Files Selected List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the list of files to be printed.  There is a limit of 50 files per
print job.  You may modify the selected list.  Un-highlight those files to NOT
print.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.1.5. Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Push this button to activate the Page Setup dialog.  This dialog has setup
options for selection of margins, inclusion of headers and footers including
use of the file name as a header and the date/time stamp in the footer and line
numbers may be added to the output. Acceptable printer forms should be detected
and shown.  The Job Properties dialog may be accessed to set the form.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.2. Page Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Page Setup dialog is used to optionally set margins, inclusion of headers
and footers, including use of the file name as a header and the date/time stamp
in the footer, and line numbers to the output. Acceptable printer forms should
be detected and shown.  The Job Properties dialog may be accessed to set the
form and other parameters.

Header

Enter a header for the page is desired. The field is limited to 128 characters.
The filename may be used as a header by checking the 'Use File name for header'
check box.

Current form

The current form is shown.  The drop down list contains the forms supported.
You must use the Job Properties dialog to change the current form.

Use printer margins

If checked, the margins on the dialog are reset to allow use of the installed
printer default margins.

Use File name for header

Check this check box to use the filename as the page header.

Add Line numbers

Check this check box to add line numbers to the document.

Include Time stamp in footer

A date/time stamp is added to the footer if checked.

Enter a footer for the page is desired. The field is limited to 128 characters.

Margins

Set the margins as desired.  Print that doesn't fit on a line is wrapped to the
next line.  This is NOT the same as word wrap as carriage returns will start a
new line.  Lines that do not fit therefore are continued to the next carriage
return and then a new line is started.

Job Properties


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.2.1. Header field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter a header for the page is desired. The field is limited to 128 characters.
The filename may be used as a header by checking the 'Use File name for header'
check box below.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.2.2. Forms list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The current form is shown.  The drop down list contains the forms supported.
You must use the Job Properties dialog to change the current form.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.2.3. Use File name for header ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this check box to use the filename as the page header.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.2.4. Add Line numbers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this check box to add line numbers to the document.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.2.5. Include Time stamp in footer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A date/time stamp is added to the footer if checked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.2.6. Footer field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter a footer for the page is desired. The field is limited to 128 characters.
The date/time stamp will be concatenated to the footer entered by checking the
'Include Time stamp in footer' check box above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.15.2.7. Job Properties... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The printer Job Properties dialog is activated by pushing the Job Properties
pushbutton. Use this dialog for further customization.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.16. Create Desktop Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Create Object dialog is initialized with the selected executeable file name
in the Object Title entry field (capitalized), the current path in the Work
Directory field, the type of program detected and a default setting of Minimize
to Hide.  You may modify any of these as desired.

The Open Mode setting is non-functional and this version only supports
placement of the object on the Desktop.

Press Create when the parameters and entry fields are correct. An "Object
successfully created" message will appear above the Parameters entry field
briefly and then the dialog will auto-close.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.16.1. Title field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.16.2. Hide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.16.3. Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.16.4. Parameters field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.16.5. Create ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.9.16.6. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. Data Panel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Data Panel

The Data Panel consists of eight pushbuttons that also serve as the label for
eight data windows for drive and file data, the Message Window and today's date
and time of day windows. Press F9 or LMB click in the current date or time
windows to activate this window for user input.  Clicking in several of the
windows is used for other events and will not activate the window.  You may Tab
through the pushbutton and windows.  The windows have special graphics to
indicate which has the keyboard focus. The only keyboard input a user may make
in any window except the Message window is access the help for that window with
the F1 key.

The functions of the eight pushbuttons are as follows:

 Label for drive Used window immediately below it. The windowed data are the
allocated  bytes used on the drive of the active file window. When pushed, the
data window will show the allocated  bytes used for all local fixed drives on
the system.

 Label for drive Free window immediately below it. The windowed data are bytes
free on the drive of the active file window. When pushed, the data window will
show the bytes free for all remote fixed drives on the system.

 Label for the Selected window immediately below it. The window shows the
allocated file size for all selected files in the active file window. When
pushed, all files in the file window are either selected or deselected,
depending on the all-selected state.

 Label for the file Name window immediately below it. The file name shown is
the name of the selected file. When pushed with a file selected, a file rename
mode is entered with an edit file name entry field presented. The label changes
color if the field is edited. Pushing Rename after the name is edited renames
the selected file.

The edit window is also used to edit file subjects.  The operation is basically
the same as file Rename after the subject edit mode is entered. To enter a file
subject edit mode, use Shift E or click with the RMB in the file Attributes
window. While in this mode the pushbutton is labeled with 'Subject'. Subjects
are limited to 40 characters.

This window is also used for Click and Sort.

 Label for the file Size window immediately below it. The file size shown in
the window is the actual file size on disk for the cursored file. When pushed,
the Drive, Directory and File Windows are reset to their default size and
position. When pushed with the Ctrl, Alt and/or Shift keys down, it is the
equivalent of pushing the keyboard 'W'.

This window is also used for Click and Sort.

 Label for the file Date window immediately below it. The window shows the last
write date for the cursored file. When pushed, the Change Date/Time dialog is
activated which allows the user to change the file last write date and time of
all selected files.

This window is also used for Click and Sort.

 Label for the file Time window immediately below it. The window shows the last
write time for the cursored file. When pushed, the Change Date/Time dialog is
activated which allows the user to change the file last write date and time of
all selected files.

 Label for the file Attributes window immediately below it. The window shows
the current file attributes for the cursored file. When pushed, the Change File
Attributes dialog is activated which allows the user to change the attributes
of all selected files.

See the following help panels for specific window help;

     Drive Used
     Drive Free
     Selected
     Name
     Size
     Date
     Time
     Attributes
     Message
     Current Date
     Current Time


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1. Drive Used ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton is labeled to indicate the contents of the drive Used window
immediately below it. The windowed data are the allocated  bytes used on the
drive of the active file window. When pushed, the data window will show the
allocated  bytes used for all local fixed drives on the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1.1. Drive Used Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The windowed data are the allocated  bytes used on the drive of the active file
window. When the drive Used button is pushed, the window will show the
allocated  bytes used for all local fixed drives on the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2. Drive Free ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton is labeled to indicate the contents of the drive Free window
immediately below it. The windowed data are bytes free on the drive of the
active file window. When pushed, the data window will show the bytes free for
all remote fixed drives on the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2.1. Drive Free Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The windowed data are bytes free on the drive of the active file window. When
the drive Free button pushed, the data window will show the bytes free for all
remote fixed drives on the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3. Selected ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton is labeled to indicate the contents of the Selected window
immediately below it. The window shows the allocated file size for all selected
files in the active file window. When pushed, all files in the file window are
either selected or deselected, depending on the all-selected state.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3.1. Selected Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The window shows the allocated file size for all selected files in the active
file window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4. Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton is labeled to indicate the contents of the file Name window
immediately below it. The file name shown is the name of the selected file.
When pushed with a file selected, a file rename mode is entered with a long
file name entry field presented. The label changes color if the field is
edited. Pushing Rename after the name is edited renames the selected file.

This pushbutton and and the window below it are also used to edit file
subjects.  The operation is basically the same after the subject edit mode is
entered. To enter a file subject edit mode, use Shift E or click with the RMB
in the file Attributes window. While in this mode the pushbutton is labeled
with 'Subject'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4.1. File Name Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File name

The file name shown is the name of the selected file. When the Name button is
pushed with a file selected, a file rename mode is entered with an edit file
name entry field presented. The file name is validated as it is entered. The
label changes color if the field is edited. Pushing Rename after the name is
edited renames the selected file.

File subject

The edit window is also used to edit file subjects.  The operation is basically
the same as file Rename after the subject edit mode is entered. To enter a file
subject edit mode, use Shift E or click with the RMB in the file Attributes
window. While in this mode the pushbutton is labeled with 'Subject'. Subjects
are limited to 40 characters.

Sort on Name

A LMB click in left half of this window will sort the active file window with
an ascending sort on file name. The left simulated LED immediately below it
will be green.

A RMB click in left half of this window will sort the active file window with
an descending sort on file name. The left simulated LED immediately below it
will be green for an ascending name sort and red for a descending name sort.

Sort on Extension

A LMB click in right half of this window will sort the active file window with
an ascending sort on file extension. The right simulated LED immediately below
it will be green.

A RMB click in right half of this window will sort the active file window with
an descending sort on file extension. The right simulated LED immediately below
it will be green for an ascending extension sort and red for a descending
extension sort.

If the active file window is sorted on another parameter, the simulated LEDs
below it will be gray.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.5. File Size Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The file size shown in the window is the actual file size on disk for the
cursored file.

A LMB click in this window will sort the active file window with an ascending
sort on file size. The simulated LED immediately below it will be green.

A RMB click in this window will sort the active file window with an descending
sort on file size. The simulated LED immediately below it will be red.

If the active file window is sorted on another parameter, the simulated LED
below it will be gray.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.6. Date ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton is labeled to indicate the contents of the file Date window
immediately below it. The window shows the last write date for the cursored
file. When pushed, the Change Date/Time dialog is activated which allows the
user to change the file last write date and time of all selected files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.6.1. File Date Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The window shows the last write date for the cursored file.

A LMB click in this window will sort the active file window with an ascending
sort on file date and time. The simulated LED immediately below it will be
green.

A RMB click in this window will sort the active file window with an descending
sort on file date and time. The simulated LED immediately below it will be red.

If the active file window is sorted on another parameter, the simulated LED
below it will be gray.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.7. Time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton is labeled to indicate the contents of the file Time window
immediately below it. The window shows the last write time for the cursored
file. When pushed, the Change Date/Time dialog is activated which allows the
user to change the file last write date and time of all selected files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.7.1. File Time Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 The window shows the last write time for the cursored file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.8. Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This pushbutton is labeled to indicate the contents of the file Attributes
window immediately below it. The window shows the current file attributes for
the cursored file. When pushed, the Change File Attributes dialog is activated
which allows the user to change the attributes of all selected files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.8.1. File Attributes Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The window shows the current file attributes for the cursored file.

A LMB click in this window is the equivalent of a keyboard Shift B and will
show the cursored file subject, if any, in the Message window.

A RMB click in this window is the equivalent of a keyboard Shift E and will
activate the edit subject mode.

There is a simulated LED immediately below the window that will be yellow if
the cursored file has a subject attached AND the file subjects are loaded.
Otherwise, this LED is colored gray.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.9. Current Date Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window shows the current date.  The date format should be in accordance
with the date setting selected in the System Setup Country Setting notebook.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.10. Current Time Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window shows the current time.  The time format should be in accordance
with the time setting selected in the System Setup Country Setting notebook.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FileStar generates five levels of messages to inform the user of functional
information, warnings and errors. See Error and Warning Messages in the manual
for the list of possible messages.

Interactive message - This highest level message pop up in a modal window (user
can't do anything else until the user responds to the message) in the center of
the FileStar/2 window.  These messages occur when an unexpected result has
occurred, unpredictable or undesirable results may occur, or at times, simply
because user input is required for how to proceed. A terse description of the
problem along with other information, such as the advisability of continuing
the program, is displayed.  The user is presented push button options for
response.

The lowest four levels are displayed in the Message window located on the Data
Panel. These are:

   1. Error  - These are messages generated by function failures. The message
      generates an error tone or sound (for sound cards) and persists visually
      in the message window for twice the persistence time set in the Settings
      notebook.

   2. Warning  - These are messages warning the user of abnormal operation
      associated with the initiated function and usually indicate the function
      could not be performed.  The message generates a warning tone sound and
      persists in the message Window for the persistence time set in the
      Settings notebook.

   3. Information  - These are information type messages.  The message is
      displayed for the duration set for message persistence in the Settings
      Notebook and are silent.

   4. Operation  - These are messages indicating ongoing actions such as
      "Scanning Drive C:".  They only exist for the duration of the action and
      are not saved.

 Since the Error, Warning, Information and Operation messages use the same
 window, they are prioritized in the order presented above.  A higher priority
 message will overwrite a lower priority messages in the message window but not
 vice versa.

 The message window is also used to display the OS/2 swap file data. This data
 has the lowest display priority and will be displayed only when all messages
 have timed out and the window is free. The swap file size and free swap space
 alternate at the interval set on the Options pages in the Settings notebook
 whenever the display window is free of messages.  Messages and swap data may
 be turned off in the notebook by setting persistence or interval respectively
 to zero.

 For the error, warning and information messages, the last ten messages of each
 type are saved for the session only.  These messages are redisplayable in a
 Message History dialog accessed through the Data Panel popup menu.

 The last message in the window may be recalled by a single click of the left
 mouse button in the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.1. Memory Alert ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FileStar/2 will automatically warn you with a dialog when the amount of memory
(RAM plus swap space) available to the system falls below a preset level, even
if FileStar/2 is minimized or is reduced to the Swap Window and another
application is the active window.

The default preset warning level of available memory is 6 MB; this value, as
well as the frequency of the swap data update, may be raised or lowered in the
FileStar/2 Settings Notebook.  Setting the value to 0 disables the memory alert
feature.  The available memory data is checked at intervals of 4 x update
frequency.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.2. Interactive Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This highest level message pop up in a modal window (user can't do anything
else until the user responds to the message) in the center of the FileStar/2
window.  These messages occur when an unexpected result has occurred,
unpredictable or undesirable results may occur, or at times, simply because
user input is required for how to proceed. A terse description of the problem
along with other information, such as the advisability of continuing the
program, is displayed.  The user is presented push button options for response.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.3. Session Message History ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Session messages are saved and may be viewed at any time by selecting the
Message History option from the Windows popup (right mouse click anywhere in
the Data Panel except the message window) or pulldown menu, or by clicking with
the right mouse button in the Message window.

Three levels of messages may be displayed:

       Information messages  (silent)
       Warning messages    (produces a warning tone)
       Error messages     (produces a error tone)

 The level of messages displayed is specified by selecting the corresponding
 check box on the dialog. The last ten messages of each type are saved by
 FileStar/2. To review the messages, select the message type.

 The Message History dialog also displays the time since boot and the peak swap
 file size during the current FileStar/2 session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.3.1. Close ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Closes the dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.3.2. Info (No beep) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.3.3. Warning (Hi beep) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.3.4. Error (Lo beep) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.3.5. Messages list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.3.6. Max swap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11.3.7. Time since boot ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. Setup Notebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Input focus must be in a page for F1 to select help for that page.

Selecting pages with the mouse is the easiest way to flip pages.  Simply click
on the tabs or the arrow buttons.

Selecting pages using the keyboard can be a little confusing at times.  To flip
pages, use Alt+PgUp/PgDn.  This will not work if the focus is on the main
notebook window.  To switch focus onto the notebook, use Alt+Up/Dn arrow
keys.These keys also move the focus to and from the page and the tab.

The notebook is closed by one of the following:

   1. Selecting "Close" on the System Menu.
   2. Double clicking on the Title Bar icon.
   3. Clicking on the STS icon.
   4. Keyboard Alt + F4.

 All notebook options are saved to the FILESTAR.INI file when the notebook is
 closed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.1. Top Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using the Notebook

The notebook contain setup controls and other options which may be used to
custom configure the program as follows;

     About support
     Configuration options
     External program links
     Settings the font
     Setting window colors
     Setting zip defaults
     Setting unzip defaults

 Input focus must be in a page for F1 to select help for that page.

 Selecting pages with the mouse is the easiest way to flip pages.  Simply click
 on the tabs or the arrow buttons.

 Selecting pages using the keyboard can be a little confusing at times.  To
 flip pages, use Alt+PgUp/PgDn.  This will not work if the focus is on the main
 notebook window.  To switch focus onto the notebook, use Alt+Up/Dn arrow keys.
 These keys also move the focus to and from the page and the tab.

 The notebook is closed by one of the following:

   1. Selecting "Close" on the System Menu.
   2. Double clicking on the Title Bar icon.
   3. Clicking on the STS icon.
   4. Keyboard Alt + F4.

 All notebook options are saved to the FILESTAR.INI file when the notebook is
 closed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2. About ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sources of support for the program are shown.  You may also view the Product
Information summary by pushing the Product Info pushbutton.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.1. Version ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the version number of this program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3. Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the options section of the notebook which currently has four pages;

     Options

     Options2

     Controls Setup

     Details Setup


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1. Page 2_1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Setting Configuration Options

Show toolbar - The Toolbar and its sibling window, the Button Help Bar, are
toggled ON and OFF with this option. The Toolbar provides one click access to
the configured items.  Users may prefer to operate FileStar/2 without the
Toolbar or standard PM menu once familiar with the program and the popup menus.

Show menu - The standard menu for PM windows may be toggled ON and OFF to
provide more area for other windows.  This option is for users that prefer to
use other features like the popup menus or the Toolbar.

Mixed case  - This option sets the case used for text in the directory and file
windows. Mixed case is the case that was used to store the file name/directory
when it was created.  Lower case is selected with Mixed Case unchecked. A drive
rescan must be performed to change the case of the directory tree following a
change of this option. If you are using long filenames, use of lower case is
discouraged.

Single key commands - Checking this option enables single key "hot keys" that
are in almost all cases the equivalent of pressing the respective combination
keys for the commands.  As an example, pressing "e" (or "E") will perform the
same command as pressing the Alt+E combination, launching the editor.  See the
combination keys shown on the menus for single key assignments. What is
sacrificed for this capability is the standard OS/2 container response of
automatic scrolling to the first or next record that starts with that letter.

Default is forced file delete - If checked, the Files Not Recoverable checkbox
in the Delete dialog will initially be checked. If the user does not change the
Files Not Recoverable option, files will be permanently deleted.

Single key delete - The delete function is not included in the single key
commands. This option enables the Del key as a single key "hot key" for file
AND directory deletions.  Note that empty directories will be instantly deleted
if Confirm directory delete is not checked. Directories that contain data will
still have a last ditch confirmation dialog presented. If Confirm file delete
is not checked, the selected file is deleted with no further user input.
Determination of whether to delete files or directories is based on the window
with the input focus.

Confirm file delete - If checked, a File Delete dialog is always used to
confirm file deletion. If unchecked, files are deleted without confirmation.

Confirm directory delete - If checked, the Delete Directory dialog is always
used to initiate deletion of directories. If unchecked, empty directories are
deleted without confirmation. Directories with files and/or subdirectories are
deleted only after confirmation by an interactive message.

Confirm copy overwrite - If checked, files will not be overwritten during a
copy operation without user confirmation. If unchecked, files of the same name
in the target directory are overwritten without confirmation.

Verify copy writes - If checked, Verify Copy Write is set ON for copy and move
operations.  The user has the option to check it OFF at the dialog level for
each dialog operation. For drag and drop operations, this setting will be in
effect.

Default drag is move - If checked, the default drag (no other keys pressed)
within FileStar is a move operation, same as the WPS. If unchecked, the default
drag is a copy operation. In either case the operation may be changed with the
Ctrl and Shift keys. If the default drag is a Copy operation and the drag is to
an object outside FileStar, the drag operation reverts to a move operation.

Open OS/2 session full screen - If checked, an OS/2 full screen session will be
initiated whenever an OS/2 session is requested via the prompts pulldown menu
or by pressing Alt+O.  By default, a windowed session is invoked.

Open DOS session full screen - If checked, a DOS full screen session will be
initiated whenever a DOS session is requested via the prompts pulldown menu or
by pressing Ctrl+O.  By default, a windowed session is invoked.

Run DOS programs full screen - If checked, DOS programs will execute in a DOS
full screen session when launched from FileStar/2.

Show execution commands - This option permits the viewing of execution commands
that FileStar/2 generates in the Message window.

Update data during file ops - This option toggles the update of the file data
windows during file operations on or off.

Expand tree branch on open - If checked, a directory tree branch is
automatically expanded when it is scanned in as the current directory.

Auto scroll tree on expand - If checked, the directory tree will auto scroll
when a branch is expanded if, in its expanded state, it will extend below the
bottom of the Directory window.  There is a limit that keeps the expanded
directory from scrolling above two directory below the top of the window.

Auto Remap Drive List - Checking this option will cause the list of available
drives to be refreshed each time the swap file data is updated in the Message
Window. This option should only be used on networks that frequently change
available drives.

Save/Restore Colors and Fonts - If checked, custom color and font changes that
the user has made with the OS/2 Color and Fonts Palettes are saved from session
to session.

Default Options Pushbutton - The Options Default pushbutton resets all options
shown on this page to the install defaults.

Default Colors and Fonts - The Colors and Fonts Default pushbutton resets all
colors and fonts to the install defaults.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.1. Show toolbar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Toolbar and its sibling window, the Button Help Bar, are toggled ON and OFF
with this option.  The Toolbar provides one click access to the configured
items.  Users may prefer to operate FileStar/2 without the Toolbar or standard
PM menu once familiar with the program and the popup menus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.2. Show menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The standard menu for PM windows may be toggled ON and OFF to provide more area
for other windows.  This option is for users that prefer to use other features
like the popup menus or the Toolbar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.3. Mixed case ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option sets the case used for text in the directory and file windows.
Mixed case is the case that was used to store the file name/directory when it
was created.  Lower case is selected with Mixed Case unchecked. A drive rescan
must be performed to change the case of the directory tree following a change
of this option. If you are using long filenames, use of lower case is
discouraged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.4. Single key commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checking this option enables single key "hot keys" that are in almost all cases
the equivalent of pressing the respective combination keys for the commands.
As an example, pressing "e" (or "E") will perform the same command as pressing
the Alt+E combination, launching the editor.  See the combination keys shown on
the menus for single key assignments. What is sacrificed for this capability is
the standard OS/2 container response of automatic scrolling to the first or
next record that starts with that letter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.5. Default is forced file delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, the Files Not Recoverable checkbox in the Delete dialog will
initially be checked. If the user does not change the Files Not Recoverable
option, files will be permanently deleted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.6. Single key delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The delete function is not included in the single key commands. This option
enables the Del key as a single key "hot key" for file AND directory deletions.
Note that empty directories will be instantly deleted if Confirm Directory
Delete is not checked. Directories that contain data will still have a last
ditch confirmation dialog presented. If Confirm File Delete is not checked, the
selected file is deleted with no further user input.  Determination of whether
to delete files or directories is based on the window with the input focus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.7. Confirm file delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, a File Delete dialog is always used to confirm file deletion. If
unchecked, files are deleted without confirmation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.8. Confirm directory delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, the Delete Directory dialog is always used to initiate deletion of
directories. If unchecked, empty directories are deleted without confirmation.
Directories with files and/or subdirectories are deleted only after
confirmation by an interactive message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.9. Confirm copy overwrite ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, files will not be overwritten during a copy operation without user
confirmation. If unchecked, files of the same name in the target directory are
overwritten without confirmation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.10. Verify copy writes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, Verify Copy Write is set ON for copy and move operations.  The user
has the option to check it OFF at the dialog level for each dialog operation.
For drag and drop operations, this setting will be in effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.11. Default drag is move ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, the default drag (no other keys pressed) within FileStar is a move
operation, same as the WPS. If unchecked, the default drag is a copy operation.
In either case the operation may be changed with the Ctrl and Shift keys. If
the default drag is a Copy operation and the drag is to an object outside
FileStar, the drag operation reverts to a move operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.12. Open OS/2 session full screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, an OS/2 full screen session will be initiated whenever an OS/2
session is requested via the prompts pulldown menu or by pressing Alt+O.  By
default, a windowed session is invoked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.13. Open DOS session full screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, a DOS full screen session will be initiated whenever a DOS session
is requested via the prompts pulldown menu or by pressing Ctrl+O.  By default,
a windowed session is invoked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.14. Run DOS programs full screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, DOS programs will execute in a DOS full screen session when
launched from FileStar/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.15. Show execution commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option permits the viewing of execution commands that FileStar/2 generates
in the Message window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.16. Update data during file ops ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option toggles the update of the file data windows during file operations
on or off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.17. Expand tree branch on open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, a directory tree branch is automatically expanded when it is
scanned in as the current directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.18. Auto scroll tree on expand ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, the directory tree will auto scroll when a branch is expanded if,
in its expanded state, it will extend below the bottom of the Directory window.
There is a limit that keeps the expanded directory from scrolling above two
directory below the top of the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.19. Auto remap drive list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checking this option will cause the list of available drives to be refreshed
each time the swap file data is updated in the Message Window. This option
should only be used on networks that frequently change available drives.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.20. Save/Restore colors and fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, custom color and font changes that the user has made with the OS/2
Color and Fonts Palettes are saved from session to session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.21. Default Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Options Default pushbutton resets all options shown on this page to the
install defaults.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.1.22. Default Colors/Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Colors and Fonts Default pushbutton resets all colors and fonts to the
install defaults.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.2. Page 2_2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Setting More Configuration Options

Load longnames - Windows 1 and 2 - If checked, a search for longname extended
attributes is performed during directory scans.  This option may also be
toggled from the Directories menu as a cascaded option of Scan Dir.

The effect of searching for the longname EA is an increase in scan time.  The
measurable effect will vary with hardware performance and may or may not be
noticeable.  It has therefore been made an option.

There is generally not a need to view the longnames, which should be present
only on FAT drives in a mixed HPFS-FAT drive system.  If a function needs the
longname EA, such as during a mixed system directory comparison, it is
programmed to search for it regardless of this option.

Load subjects - Windows 1 and 2 - If checked, a search for subject extended
attributes is performed during directory scans.  This option may also be
toggled from the Directories menu as a cascaded option of Scan Dir.

The effect of searching for the subject EA is an increase in scan time.  The
measurable effect will vary with hardware performance and may or may not be
noticeable.  It has therefore been made an option. The use of this option will
be dependent of your use of this feature.

Save filters on shutdown - If checked, the file filters for both file windows
are saved on program shutdown.  They are then used on next startup.  A reminder
message appears after startup stating the file are filtered and showing the
filters in effect.  Of course, the window title bar also shows the filter in
use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.2.1. Load longnames - Window 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, a search for longname extended attributes is performed during
directory scans.

This option may also be toggled from the Directories menu as a cascaded option
of Scan Dir.

The effect of searching for the longname EA is an increase in scan time.  The
measurable effect will vary with hardware performance and may or may not be
noticeable.  It has therefore been made an option.

There is generally not a need to view the longnames, which should be present
only on FAT drives in a mixed HPFS-FAT drive system.  If a function needs the
longname EA, such as during a mixed system directory comparison, it is
programmed to search for it regardless of this option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.2.2. Load longnames - Window 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, a search for longname extended attributes is performed during
directory scans.

This option may also be toggled from the Directories menu as a cascaded option
of Scan Dir.

The effect of searching for the longname EA is an increase in scan time.  The
measurable effect will vary with hardware performance and may or may not be
noticeable.  It has therefore been made an option.

There is generally not a need to view the longnames, which should be present
only on FAT drives in a mixed HPFS-FAT drive system.  If a function needs the
longname EA, such as during a mixed system directory comparison, it is
programmed to search for it regardless of this option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.2.3. Load subjects - Window 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, a search for subject extended attributes is performed during
directory scans.

This option may also be toggled from the Directories menu as a cascaded option
of Scan Dir.

The effect of searching for the subject EA is an increase in scan time.  The
measurable effect will vary with hardware performance and may or may not be
noticeable.  It has therefore been made an option. The use of this option will
be dependent of your use of this feature.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.2.4. Load subjects - Window 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, a search for subject extended attributes is performed during
directory scans.

This option may also be toggled from the Directories menu as a cascaded option
of Scan Dir.

The effect of searching for the subject EA is an increase in scan time.  The
measurable effect will vary with hardware performance and may or may not be
noticeable.  It has therefore been made an option. The use of this option will
be dependent of your use of this feature.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.2.5. Save filters on shutdown ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If checked, the file filters for both file windows are saved on program
shutdown.  They are then used on next startup.  A reminder message appears
after startup stating the file are filtered and showing the filters in effect.
Of course, the window title bar also shows the filter in use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.3. Page 2_3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Controls Setup Options

Start Mode - The start mode may be set to Normal, Swap, Minimized or Maximized.
The setting may be overridden with command line switches as described in the
Starting FileStar/2 section.

Byte Format - This sets the byte format used in most but not all windows. The
exceptions are:

     Size window (File size) - Always in bytes.
     Selected window (Selected total) - Uses set mode except kilobytes are
      displayed with megabytes set.
     File window data display - Always in bytes.

 Vertical Tree Spacing - OS/2 3.0 introduced very tight tree spacing.  This
 option permits user adjustment of the tree vertical spacing.

 Swap Frequency - Adjusts the display update frequency of the swap data.

 Available Memory Warning _ Sets the threshold for FS/2 to issue an available
 memory warning.

 Message Persistence  - Most of the FileStar/2 messages are displayed in the
 Message window of the Data Panel.  Messages are erased automatically after the
 persistence time selected with this control for information messages. Warning
 and error messages persist for one and two times the persistence value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.3.1. Normal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The start mode is set to Normal. The setting may be overridden with command
line switches as described in the Starting FileStar/2 section.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.3.2. Swap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The start mode is set to Swap. The setting may be overridden with command line
switches as described in the Starting FileStar/2 section.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.3.3. Minimized ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The start mode is set to Minimized. The setting may be overridden with command
line switches as described in the Starting FileStar/2 section.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.3.4. Maximized ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The start mode is set to Maximized. The setting may be overridden with command
line switches as described in the Starting FileStar/2 section.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.3.5. Bytes (b) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This sets the byte format used to bytes in all windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.3.6. Kilobytes (k) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This sets the byte format used to kilobytes in most but not all windows. The
exceptions are:

     Size window (File size) - Always in bytes.
     File window data display  - Always in bytes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.3.7. Megabytes (m) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This sets the byte format used to megabytes in most but not all windows. The
exceptions are:

     Size window (File size) - Always in bytes.
     Selected window (Selected total) - Kilobytes are displayed.
     File window Information panel - Always in bytes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.3.8. Swap Display Update Frequency ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This control adjusts the display update frequency of the swap data. If set to
0, the swap mode is disabled.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.3.9. Vertical Tree Spacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OS/2 3.0 introduced very tight tree spacing.  This control permits user
adjustment of the tree vertical spacing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.3.10. Available Memory Warning ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This control sets the threshold for the available memory warning. If set to 0,
the warning is disabled.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.3.11. Message Persistence ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Most of the messages are displayed in the Message window of the Data Panel.
Messages are erased automatically after the persistence time selected with this
control for information messages. Warning and error messages persist for one
and two times the persistence value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.4. Page 2_4 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Details View Options

Configure Window 1 or 2 - The Details view for each file window is configured
independently. The Configure radio buttons select which file window is the
object for the settings. You may notice that the actual windows are selected in
the background and the results of the settings may be viewed by moving the
notebook.

Detail view columns - The 1st and 2nd column controls are disabled.  The Name
and Longname columns must be in columns 1 and 2 for the compare function to
work with long file name comparisons. Any of the following may be set in
columns 3 through 8 of the Details view;

     Subj - File subject EA
     EAS - Total size of EAs
     Size - File size
     Date - File Last Write date
     Time - File Last Write time
     Attr - File attributes

 Splitbar position - Set the desired splitbar position.

 Configure pushbutton - Updates the selected window with the set configuration.

 No titles - This checkbox sets whether the column titles are visible or not
 visible.

 No splitbar - This checkbox sets whether the splitbar is visible or not
 visible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.4.1. Window 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Details view for each file window is configured independently. This radio
button selects File Window 1 as the object for the settings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.4.2. Window 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Details view for each file window is configured independently. This radio
button selects File window 2 as the object for the settings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.4.3. No titles checkbox ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This checkbox sets whether the column titles are visible or not visible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.4.4. No splitbar checkbox ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This checkbox sets whether the splitbar is visible or not visible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3.4.5. Configure pushbutton ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Configure Non-Specific Dialog Control  (subtype: WC_STATIC) dialog item...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4. Paths ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section of the notebook is used to set associations and path data used to
link to external programs. It currently has 3 pages;

     External programs

     User defined 1

     User defined 2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.1. Page 3_1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

External Programs

FileStar does not directly support the WPS file associations. Instead, double
clicking or "Executing" a file in one of the file windows launches or runs a
pre-defined program associated with the file extension. For instance, double
clicking on an *.INF file will cause the file to be run with VIEW.EXE.

Since there are various options available for ASCII editors, browsers and
printer support, the user must use this External Programs page to link an
external program of choice with the function. Windows programs are supported
for use as external programs.

Do not alter the order of these function!

The following functions must be configured with an external executable program.
Press the appropriate pushbutton to configure using the Configure External
Programs dialog;

1. Edit function - Configures the editor that you want to use for editing ASCII
text files. Default is the OS/2 Enhanced Editor, EPM.EXE.

2. Browse function - Configures the browser that you want to use for browsing.
Default is the OS/2 Editor, E.EXE.

3. Zip function - Configures the zip program used for archiving files.  This
file must be InfoZIP's ZIP.EXE.

4. Unzip function - Configures the unzip program used for extracting zipped
files.  This file must be InfoZIP's UNZIP.EXE or UNZIP32.EXE.

5. Compare Files function - Configures the compare program used for comparing
files. Default is the OS/2 compare program COMP.COM.

6. Directory Compare function - Configures an external directory compare
program used for optional use.  This program may be used in addition to the
internal function through the accelerator keys Ctrl Alt =.

7. Print function - Enter the name of a print interface program to be used for
printing files.  Default is the internal print function.

If the location of the zip files required to support zip archiving operations
are included in the config.sys path statement, the program will find them and
fill the zip and unzip entry fields for you.  Otherwise, you must enter the
complete path information to both the zip.exe and unzip.exe file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.1.1. First pushbutton ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

All pushbuttons activate a Configure External Program dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.2. Page 3_2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

User Defined Associations

Use this page to associate external programs with files. Press any blank
labeled pushbutton to set an association or any labeled pushbutton to change an
association. This will activate the Configure External Programs dialog and hide
the notebook while it is in use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.2.1. First pushbutton ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

All pushbuttons activate a Configure External Program dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.3. Page 3_3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

User Defined Associations

This page is identical to Page 3_2.

Use this page to associate external programs with files. Press any blank
labeled pushbutton to set an association or any labeled pushbutton to change an
association. This will activate the Configure External Programs dialog and hide
the notebook while it is in use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.3.1. First pushbutton ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

All pushbuttons activate a Configure External Program dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.4. Configure External Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Executable program entry field

Enter the executable program to be used when a file matching an associated
extension is 'run' (double clicked or keyboard Enter). The entry must include
the full path/filename. You may enter this path/filename manually or you may
simply switch to the directory containing the executable file and click on the
file to auto enter the path/filename.

The entry field may have program parameters added after the executable
path/filename.

You may add switches directly as program parameters instead of using the
Switches field or you may refer to switches in the Switches entry field with a
%S in the parameters.  However, switches in the Switches entry field are passed
as the first parameters unless you use the %S to place these elsewhere in the
parameters string.

You may also add the following symbols to reference path strings as program
parameters. If the program just needs the selected file passed, these
parameters are not required.  If additional parameters are passed, they may be
required:

     %f - pass the selected filename without a path.
     %F - pass the selected filename with a path.
     %d - pass the selected directory name.
     %D - pass the full selected directory path.
     %V - pass the drive letter with colon.

 File filters entry field

 For those programs required for functional operation on the External Programs
 page, enter an '*' for the file filter.  Except for the program viewer, these
 programs are run without regard to file filtering when selected as a program
 function.  E.g., the program editor will always be started regardless for the
 file type if the Edit function is used.

 On the User Defined Associations pages 3_2 and 3_3, use the File filters entry
 field to enter filters to associate files matching these filters to the
 executable program, e.g. '*.BMP;*.GIF;*.TIF;*.TGA;*.JPG;'. You must use the
 ';' as a delimiter with multiple filters.

 The entry field is limited to 128 characters.

 Switches entry field

 Use this entry field to indicate the program switches (parameters) to to
 concatenated to the command line. Such switches are normally program specific.
 It is not necessary to add any parameters to the executable entry field.
 However, you may add any switches directly in the executable entry field in
 lieu of using the Switches field.

 The entry field is limited to 32 characters.

 Label entry field

 Use this entry field to customize the label on the pushbutton used to enter
 this configuration dialog. E.g. 'UniMaint INI Editor' could be the label on
 the program association to an INI editor.  The entry field is limited to 20
 characters.

 Accepts multiple files

 This checkbox is used to indicate whether the executable program can handle
 more than one file.  Some editor programs support multiple loading of files.
 If this option is checked and the program supports it, you may select several
 files and they will all load in the same program instance.

 Enable ASCII filter

 If this option is checked, the file(s) matching the associated extensions are
 checked for pure ASCII content before being accepted.

 Type program

 There is no user input required for the Type Program except you may select
 windowed or full screen sessions for non-PM programs.  You should make sure
 that the program properly detects the configured program.

 Clear pushbutton

 The Clear pushbutton clears all entry fields and resets the dialog to a blank
 configuration.

 Examples

 Example to configure loaddskf.exe to make disk images;

     Set the file filters as '*.dsk;*.?dk'.

     Enter the path/filename to the program in the executable entry field,
      e.g. 'J:\Loaddskf\loaddskf.exe'. Add the parameters '%F A:'

     If the selected file passed the filter test, 'J:\Loaddskf\loaddskf.exe %F
      A:' would run the loaddskf.exe program located in drive/directory
      'J:\Loaddskf' on the selected file (%F) and pass as the second parameter
      'A:'.  The '%F' would be required since a second parameter follows.

 Example to use configure an image program to view image files;

     Set the file filters to '*.BMP;*.GIF;*.TIF;*.TGA;*.JPG;*.EPS;*.PIC;'.

     Enter the path/filename to the program in the executable entry field,
      e.g. 'I:\viewer\myview.exe'.  No parameters are required.

     A double click on any file with an extension matching one of the filters
      would be viewed if the program, myview.exe, supported it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.4.1. Executable program extry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the executable program to be used when a file matching an associated
extension is 'run' (double clicked or keyboard Enter). The entry must include
the full path/filename. You may enter this path/filename manually or you may
simply switch to the directory containing the executable file and click on the
file to auto enter the path/filename.

The entry field may have program parameters added after the executable
path/filename.

You may add switches directly as program parameters instead of using the
Switches field or you may refer to switches in the Switches entry field with a
%S in the parameters.  However, switches in the Switches entry field are passed
as the first parameters unless you use the %S to place these elsewhere in the
parameters string.

You may also add the following symbols to reference path strings as program
parameters. If the program just needs the selected file passed, these
parameters are not required.  If additional parameters are passed, they may be
required:

     %f - pass the selected filename without a path.
     %F - pass the selected filename with a path.
     %d - pass the selected directory name.
     %D - pass the full selected directory path.
     %V - pass the drive letter with colon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.4.2. Filemask entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For those programs required for functional operation on the External Programs
page, enter an '*' for the file filter.  Except for the program viewer, these
programs are run without regard to file filtering when selected as a program
function.  E.g., the program editor will always be started regardless for the
file type if the Edit function is used.

On the User Defined Associations pages 3_2 and 3_3, use the File filters entry
field to enter filters to associate files matching these filters to the
executable program, e.g. '*.BMP;*.GIF;*.TIF;*.TGA;*.JPG;'. You must use the ';'
as a delimiter with multiple filters.

The entry field is limited to 128 characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.4.3. Switches entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this entry field to indicate the program switches (parameters) to to
concatenated to the command line. Such switches are normally program specific.
It is not necessary to add any parameters to the executable entry field.
However, you may add any switch directly in the executable entry field in lieu
of using the Switches field.

The entry field is limited to 32 characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.4.4. Label entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this entry field to customize the label on the pushbutton used to enter
this configuration dialog. E.g. 'UniMaint INI Editor' could be the label on the
program association to an INI editor.  The entry field is limited to 20
characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.4.5. Accepts multiple files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This checkbox is used to indicate whether the executable program can handle
more than one file.  Some editor programs support multiple loading of files.
If this option is checked and the program supports it, you may select several
files and they will all load in the same program instance.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.4.6. Enable ASCII filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If this option is checked, the file(s) matching the associated extensions are
checked for pure ASCII content before being accepted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4.4.7. Clear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Clear pushbutton clear all entry fields and resets the dialog to a blank
configuration.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.5. Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Changing fonts in FileStar/2 is similar to changing fonts in OS/2.  The Fonts
page provides a method for customizing fonts in the FileStar/2 main window. You
may set the font for the Drive, Directory and two File windows in a single
step.  The font used in the Data Panel and the menus is selected in separate
steps by selecting Data Panel and Menus under the Change caption.

When a font is applied to the menus, it is applied to the PM menu and all
context popup menus.

The Save pushbutton sets and saves the font selection for subsequent FileStar/2
sessions.

The Apply pushbutton sets the font for trial. The font is saved when the
notebook is closed. Pushing Reset before closing the notebook should restore
the previous font.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.5.1. Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Any font applied with this option selected is set in the Drive, Directory and
two File windows in one step.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.5.2. Data Panel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Any font applied with this option selected is set in all Data Panel windows in
one step.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.5.3. Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Any font applied with this option selected is set in all menus, including
context menus, in one step.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.6. Colors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Coloring the FileStar Windows

The OS/2 color palette will NOT change the Window 2background color of the
drive, directory and file windows. This color is under program control to
associate the background color of these window with the active window.

You may change the Window background, foreground, hilite background and hilite
foreground colors using the controls presented.

     Select either File Window #1 or #2.
     Use the Background, Foreground, Hilite Background and Hilite Foreground
      radio buttons to select the color to change.
     Use the mouse or keyboard to change to the Red, Green and Blue settings.

 The real windows will update in the background when the color control
 scrolling terminates.  The small sample windows reflect the colors during and
 after scroll.  The notebook may be moved to view the changes in FileStar's
 windows.

 The user is encouraged to use the OS/2 color palette to colorize the
 FileStar/2 main Window 1s desired. Almost all pushbuttons, controls and
 windows except those mentioned above be colored with the palette. However, to
 save all custom colorization you must check the "Save/Restore colors and
 fonts" checkbox on Options page 2_1 of the Settings Notebook.

 The colors dropped on dialogs are not saved.

 Dropping colors on the Toolbar window is not recommended or supported. The
 frame around the bitmaps will take colors but the bitmap background will not.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.6.1. Background ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Any color change made while this radio button is selected is applied to the
Window background.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.6.2. Foreground ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Any color change made while this radio button is selected is applied to the
window foreground.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.6.3. Hilite Background ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Any color change made while this radio button is selected is applied to the
window hilite background.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.6.4. Hilite Foreground ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Any color change made while this radio button is selected is applied to the
window hilite foreground.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.6.5. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Coloring the FileStar Windows

The OS/2 color palette will NOT change the Window 2background color of the
drive, directory and file windows. This color is under program control to
associate the background color of these window with the active window.

You may change the Window background, foreground, hilite background and hilite
foreground colors using the controls presented.

     Select either File Window #1 or #2.
     Use the Background, Foreground, Hilite Background and Hilite Foreground
      radio buttons to select the color to change.
     Use the mouse or keyboard to change to the Red, Green and Blue settings.

 The real windows will update in the background when the color control
 scrolling terminates.  The small sample windows reflect the colors during and
 after scroll.  The notebook may be moved to view the changes in FileStar's
 windows.

 The user is encouraged to use the OS/2 color palette to colorize the
 FileStar/2 main Window 1s desired. Almost all pushbuttons, controls and
 windows except those mentioned above be colored with the palette. However, to
 save all custom colorization you must check the "Save/Restore colors and
 fonts" checkbox on Options page 2_1 of the Settings Notebook.

 The colors dropped on dialogs are not saved.

 Dropping colors on the Toolbar window is not recommended or supported. The
 frame around the bitmaps will take colors but the bitmap background will not.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7. Zip Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Zip Switch Options This dialog is used to set the default zip options.
Check each option that you want to include in the default option string. The
string is updated as you change options. Those options that are mutually
exclusive are handled within the program.

The degree of compression is increased with higher compression levels. A
compression level of zero results in no compression. The compression speed is
slower with higher compression levels.

You may use the Default Path entry field to enter a default target directory or
check either the Same window directory or the Other window directory as the
default target path.

Do not double click with the LMB on these options. The Options string may not
be the same as the checked options in this case.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.1. Freshen existing entries if more recent than one in archive. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.2. Freshen existing entries if more recent and add new files. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.3. Grow (append) instead of creating new archive. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.4. Junk paths. Store just the file name. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.5. Move files to archive. Deletes source files/empty directories. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.6. Includes files with system and hidden attributes. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.7. Test new archive before removing old archive when finished. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.8. Encrypt prompting for password twice. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.9. Convert paths, filenames for DOS compatibility. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.10. Quiet operation. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.11. Verbose mode. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.12. Prompt for multi-line comment. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.13. Include volume label. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.14. Compression level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.15. Zip To Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This entry field is used to set the default target directory to some constant
directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.16. Same window directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This sets the default target directory to the source directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.17. Other window directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This sets the default target directory to the directory of the other file
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.18. Switches ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This entry field reflects the checked switches string.  It is read only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7.19. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Zip Switch Options This dialog is used to set the default zip options.
Check each option that you want to include in the default option string. The
string is updated as you change options. Those options that are mutually
exclusive are handled within the program.

The degree of compression is increased with higher compression levels. A
compression level of zero results in no compression. The compression speed is
slower with higher compression levels.

You may use the Default Path entry field to enter a default target directory or
check either the Same window directory or the Other window directory as the
default target path.

Do not double click with the LMB on these options. The Options string may not
be the same as the checked options in this case.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8. Unzip Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Unzip Switch Options This dialog is used to set the default unzip options.
Check each option that you want to include in the default option string. The
string is updated as you change options. Those options that are mutually
exclusive are handled within the program.

You may use the Default Path entry field to enter a default target directory or
check either the Same window directory or the Other window directory as the
default target path.

Do not double click with the LMB on these options. The Options string may not
be the same as the checked options in this case.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.1. Freshen existing files, extracting only those already on disk. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.2. Freshen existing files, create new ones if needed. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.3. Junk paths. Archive's directory structure not recreated. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.4. Never overwrite existing files. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.5. Convert spaces in filenames to underscores. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.6. Don't change filename case. Extract as stored. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.7. Quiet operation. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.8. Quieter operation. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.9. Restore volume label if diskette. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help not implemented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.10. Unzip To Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This entry field is used to set the default target directory to some constant
directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.11. Same Window Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This sets the default target directory to the source directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.12. Other window directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This sets the default target directory to the directory of the other file
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.13. Unzip switches entry field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This entry field reflects the checked switches string.  It is read only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8.14. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Unzip Switch Options This dialog is used to set the default unzip options.
Check each option that you want to include in the default option string. The
string is updated as you change options. Those options that are mutually
exclusive are handled within the program.

You may use the Default Path entry field to enter a default target directory or
check either the Same window directory or the Other window directory as the
default target path.

Do not double click with the LMB on these options. The Options string may not
be the same as the checked options in this case.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. Customization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The FileStar/2 window may be customized using the OS/2 Color and Font palettes.
All window sizing and customization data is saved upon closing the application
in the FILESTAR.INI file.  The OS/2 color palette will NOT change the window
background or the selected file hilight background and foreground colors of the
directory and file windows.  You may change the window background colors using
the coloring tool on Color page of the Settings Notebook.

Foreground and background colors, as well as the menu font, of the Action Bar
menu may be set by the user.

The Action Bar may be removed from the display by deselecting the Standard Menu
option in the FileStar/2 Settings notebook. This is a viable option since all
menu items are accessible from pop up menus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.1. Colors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The background color for the drive, directory and file windows may be
customized using the coloring tool found on the Color page of the FileStar/2
Settings notebook. All other windows and pushbuttons, both foreground and
background, may be colored, as desired using the WPS Color Palettes, which may
be conveniently accessed from either the popup or pulldown Setup menu. The
Save/Restore Colors and Fonts option must be checked on the Options page of the
Settings notebook to save user changes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.2. Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The font in all primary display windows may be changed by using the WPS Font
Palette or the Font page in the FileStar/2 Settings notebook. It is recommended
that the FileStar/2 Settings notebook font tool be used since it sets all
windows to the same font in the internal windows, Data Panel and pull down
menus in two steps.  Using the FileStar/2 Font page also usually results in
tighter spacing of the file window lists.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.3. Creating an Anti-Virus Toolbar Item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 A toolbar anti-virus item may be created to run an anti-virus program on the
selected file, directory or drive.  These items must be customized for a
specific program. The following procedure shows how to define these items for
the IBM Anti-Virus program.  Some command line parameters will be different for
other programs but you should be able to configure most any program to work.

   1. Right click anywhere on the toolbar for popup menu.  Select 'Configure'.

   2. In the Configure Toolbar dialog, scroll the upper 'Built in toolbar'
      until you see the embossed text bitmaps.  Immediately to the left are 4
      AV bitmaps, the leftmost is the IBMAV microscope.  It will say 'Push for
      anti-virus options' when clicked on.  Drag this item to the 'Current'
      toolbar immediately below and place it anywhere desired.

   3. While holding down the ALT key, ALT Drag the other three items (the file,
      directory and drive bitmaps) and drop them on top on the 'Microscope' in
      the current toolbar.  Drag them in the order they appear, or the reverse
      of that, since these will become the file, directory, and drive AV check
      items.

   4. When the Current toolbar 'microscope' is clicked on, these three items
      should appear as dropdown items.

   5. Click Ok to close the dialog which will update the real current toolbar.

   6. Each dropdown item must be configured as appropriate.  Click on the
      'Microscope' item to drop down the three sub-items.  Then right click on
      each and select 'Edit Item' from the popup menu.  A notebook will appear
      with Action and General pages.

      (a) For the 'File' bitmap, enter X:\IBMAV\IBMAVSP.EXE -LOG -SCOMP %F in
      the Parameters field of the Action page and 'AV File' as the title on the
      General page;

      b) For the 'Directory' bitmap, enter X:\IBMAV\IBMAVSP.EXE -LOG %D and 'AV
      Dir'.

      c) For the 'Drive' bitmap, enter X:\IBMAV\IBMAVSP.EXE -LOG %V and 'AV
      Drive'.

 In each example, X:\IBMAV\IBMAVSP.EXE is the full path/file name for your AV
 program on your system so configure accordingly.  Other command line
 parameters, such as different logging options, may be used as desired.

 When an AV option item is clicked on, the anti-virus program will run on the
 highlighted (cursored) file, directory, or drive as selected.

 Although the new toolbar will be saved on shutdown, it is  recommended that
 the new toolbar be saved as 'my.bar' or some such name using the toolbar popup
 menu and 'Save Toolbar As...'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13.4. Adding a last window style toggle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A last window style toggle may be added to the toolbar as follows;

   1. Right click anywhere on the toolbar for popup menu.  Select 'Configure'.

   2. In the Configure Toolbar dialog, scroll the upper 'Built in toolbar'
      until you see the bitmaps shown above.  Drag the item described as
      'Toggles to last window style' to the 'Current' toolbar immediately below
      and place it anywhere desired.

   3. Click Ok to close the dialog which will update the real current toolbar.

 Using the window style ring toggle in the left lower corner of either File
 window, select the preferred window style.  Then using the Windows dropdown
 menu, select the alternate preferred style.  Thereafter, pushing the Last
 window style toolbar item will toggle between the two window styles.